iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING Startup Manual (System)

244
iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING Startup Manual (System)

Transcript of iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING Startup Manual (System)

iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENINGStartup Manual (System)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS(Always read these precautions before using this system.)

Before installation, operation, maintenance, or inspection of the system devices used in this system, thoroughly read thorough and understand this manual and all the relevant manuals and handle the product correctly. Before using the product, become familiar with the devices, safety information, and precautions.

In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as " WARNING" and " CAUTION".

Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances.Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING

Make sure to shut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or damage to the product.

Make sure to install all terminal covers before turning on the power or performing operations after installation or wiring work.Failure to do so may cause an electric shock.

Tighten the screws within the specified torque range.Undertightening can cause the product to drop, short circuit, or malfunction.Overtightening cause the product to drop, short circuit, or malfunction due to the damage of the screws and/or module.

Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module.Doing so can cause a module malfunction or failure.

Connectors for wiring must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer, or must be correctly soldered.Incomplete connections may cause a short circuit, fire, or malfunction.

When using an SD memory card, fully insert it into the SD memory card slot.After the insertion, check that the SD memory card has been inserted completely.Poor contact may cause system malfunctions.

WARNINGIndicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

death or severe injury.

CAUTIONIndicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

minor or moderate injury or property damage.

A - 1

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION

Install the system devices used in this system securely.

When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits of electrical products such as a programmable controller, GOT, and power supply. Doing so may cause a fire, module failures, or malfunctions.

Install an SD memory card, USB memory, and barcode reader securely to their prescribed connectors.Any installation failures, floating parts, or tilted installation of them can cause system malfunctions.

Perform class D grounding (Grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) to the grounding terminals on the programmable

controller, GOT, control panel, and others using a wire of 2 mm2 or thicker.Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.

Connect the AC and DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals shown in the electrical diagrams.Incorrect connections will burn out the programmable controller.

Do not wire vacant terminals externally.Doing so may damage the product.

Connect cables so that hands or feet will not be caught.Doing so can cause a fall or an injury or damages of the product.

WARNING

Do not directly touch any conductive parts of the product during power-on.Doing so may cause an electric shock, malfunctions, or failures.

Before cleaning or retightening terminals, shut off all phases of the power supply externally.Failure to do so may cause an electric shock.Failure to do so can cause the module to fail or malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the product.Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, or fire.(For repair of the product, please contact your local sales office.)

Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of electrical devices.Doing so may cause an electric shock, malfunctions, or failures.

Always turn off the power before installing or removing electrical devices.Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions.

Never use the product in areas with excessive dust, greasy fumes, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (Salt air, Cl2, H2S, SO2 or NO2), flammable gas, vibration or impacts, or expose the product to high temperature, condensation, or rain and wind.If the product is used in such conditions, electric shocks, fire, malfunctions, deterioration, or damage may occur.

Do not drop the system devices used in this system or subject them to strong shock.Doing so may damage the products.

Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material such as a pen or driver.Doing so can cause a damage or failure of the display section.

A - 2

[STORAGE AND DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]

[PRECAUTIONS ON INTRODUCTION OF USER PROGRAMS]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING SD MEMORY CARDS]

[OTHER PRECAUTIONS (REQUESTS)]

CAUTION

Operate and store the product in an environment without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity, and vibrations.

When disposing of the system devices used in this system, treat them as industrial waste.When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.

Dispose of used batteries promptly. Keep them away from children. Do not disassemble used batteries or do not dispose of the batteries in fire.

WARNING

If this system is customized by users, each function of the SCREW TIGHTENING Application may delay or stop its processing.On each user's responsibility, customize the SCREW TIGHTENING Application and its functions and check the operation of them.

Do not change values of the devices used in this system from a user program.Doing so may cause malfunctions.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch an SD memory card with hands because the card terminal is bare. Failure to do so may cause malfunctions or failures.

When removing the SD memory card, open the SD memory card cover and make sure that the Access LED is off. Failure to do so may corrupt files.

CAUTION

This system has been created as a general-purpose product for general industries, and has not been designed or created to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human lives.

When using this system with other products, please confirm the standard and the code, or regulations with which users should follow.Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this system to the system, machine, and apparatus with which users use.

For the safety precautions of the system devices manufactured by other companies and used in this system, refer to the product manuals supplied with the devices.

If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the system, always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and has specialized knowledge in electricity (knowledge that electrical workers have or equivalent knowledge). If in doubt about the operation or usage of this system, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.

Do not modify, delete, or add contents in this manual. The contents, specification, and others in this manual may be changed for improvement without any notice.The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you have noticed a doubtful point, a doubtful error, and others, please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.

A - 3

SYSTEM APPLICATION

The Mitsubishi SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries.MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.

• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the public could be greatly affected if any failure or malfunction occurs in the product.

• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the purchaser or end user.

• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize the use of the product in one or more of the Prohibited uses, provided that the usage of the product is limited only for the specific uses agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the products are required. For details, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.

A - 4

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................................A - 1

SYSTEM APPLICATION ..........................................................................................................................A - 4

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 5

CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 5

RELEVANT MANUALS.............................................................................................................................A - 9

REFERENCE MANUALS BY PURPOSE...............................................................................................A - 11

TERMS ...................................................................................................................................................A - 12

REQUESTING AND REGISTERING A LICENSE KEY..........................................................................A - 15

1. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION

1.1 Entire System Configuration ............................................................................................................ 1 - 1

1.1.1 Software and database components .................................................................................... 1 - 3

1.2 Data and Signal Exchanges ............................................................................................................ 1 - 4

1.3 Operating Environment.................................................................................................................... 1 - 5

1.4 Steps Before Operation ................................................................................................................... 1 - 6

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 List of System Devices .................................................................................................................... 2 - 1

2.1.1 Products in the iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package ............................ 2 - 1

2.1.2 Product to be prepared by users .......................................................................................... 2 - 2

2.1.3 Product to be prepared by users (depends on the system configuration) ............................ 2 - 7

2.1.4 Precautions for use............................................................................................................... 2 - 7

2.2 Files in DVD-ROM ........................................................................................................................... 2 - 8

3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANEL

3.1 Layout Example ............................................................................................................................... 3 - 1

3.2 Circuit Design Example ................................................................................................................... 3 - 3

3.3 Building a Control Panel and Operation Panel ................................................................................ 3 - 5

3.3.1 Building a control panel (chassis) ......................................................................................... 3 - 5

3.3.2 Building an operation panel (chassis)................................................................................... 3 - 8

3.4 Installing a Programmable Controller System ............................................................................... 3 - 11

3.4.1 Entire system configuration ................................................................................................ 3 - 11

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package.

This manual, "iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING Startup Manual (System)" describes the information on the

operation panel design, assembly procedures, system configurations, installation, test operations, and

troubleshooting of the SCREW TIGHTENING Application required for constructing a SCREW TIGHTENING

Application system.

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with

the functions and performance of the SCREW TIGHTENING Application to design the product correctly.

CONTENTS

A - 5

3.4.2 I/O interface of a programmable controller ......................................................................... 3 - 12

3.4.3 Precautions on system configuration.................................................................................. 3 - 12

3.4.4 Checking serial number and function version..................................................................... 3 - 13

3.4.5 Connecting the modules ..................................................................................................... 3 - 14

3.4.6 Mounting on a DIN rail ........................................................................................................ 3 - 15

3.5 Installing a GOT............................................................................................................................. 3 - 18

3.5.1 I/O interface of a GOT ........................................................................................................ 3 - 18

3.5.2 Installing the GOT............................................................................................................... 3 - 19

3.5.3 Confirming of versions and conforming standards ............................................................. 3 - 20

3.6 Wiring the Control Panel and Operation Panel .............................................................................. 3 - 21

3.6.1 Wiring.................................................................................................................................. 3 - 21

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES

4.1 Installing the Control Panel and Operation Panel ............................................................................ 4 - 1

4.2 Installing Barcode Readers.............................................................................................................. 4 - 2

4.2.1 Barcode reader manufactured by DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.................................. 4 - 3

4.2.2 Barcode reader manufactured by Cognex Corporation ........................................................ 4 - 4

4.3 Installing Electric Screwdrivers ........................................................................................................ 4 - 5

4.3.1 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver............................................................................... 4 - 5

4.3.2 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver ....................................................................... 4 - 6

4.3.3 Externally connected electric screwdriver............................................................................. 4 - 6

4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals ..................................................................................................... 4 - 7

4.4.1 Push-button type................................................................................................................... 4 - 8

4.4.2 Lever type ........................................................................................................................... 4 - 10

4.4.3 Transparent type................................................................................................................. 4 - 12

4.4.4 Door type ............................................................................................................................ 4 - 16

4.4.5 Small door type (Horizontal metal arm) .............................................................................. 4 - 20

4.4.6 Ultra-compact touch type.................................................................................................... 4 - 24

4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK ................................................................................................................. 4 - 27

4.5.1 Precautions for wiring ......................................................................................................... 4 - 28

4.5.2 Use of two-wire type terminals and four-wire type terminals .............................................. 4 - 29

4.5.3 Cables................................................................................................................................. 4 - 30

4.5.4 Terminator for AnyWireASLINK.......................................................................................... 4 - 30

4.5.5 Attaching the link connector................................................................................................ 4 - 31

4.6 Installing Other External Signal I/O Devices.................................................................................. 4 - 34

4.7 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 34

5. SYSTEM SETTING

5.1 Starting up the Programmable Controller ........................................................................................ 5 - 1

5.2 Installing Sequence Programs......................................................................................................... 5 - 1

5.2.1 Preparing a GX Works2 project ............................................................................................ 5 - 2

5.2.2 Reading a project.................................................................................................................. 5 - 2

5.2.3 IP address setting ................................................................................................................. 5 - 3

5.2.4 Registering a license key...................................................................................................... 5 - 4

5.2.5 Customizing the project ........................................................................................................ 5 - 5

5.2.6 Writing the project................................................................................................................. 5 - 6

5.3 Starting up the GOT......................................................................................................................... 5 - 7

5.4 Installing Screen Data...................................................................................................................... 5 - 7

A - 6

5.4.1 Preparing a GT Designer3 project ........................................................................................ 5 - 7

5.4.2 Reading a project ................................................................................................................. 5 - 7

5.4.3 IP address setting................................................................................................................. 5 - 8

5.4.4 Setting the FTP server function ............................................................................................ 5 - 9

5.4.5 Setting the GOT MES interface function ............................................................................ 5 - 10

5.4.6 Customizing the project ...................................................................................................... 5 - 11

5.4.7 Writing the project............................................................................................................... 5 - 11

5.5 Registering a License of the GOT MES Interface Function........................................................... 5 - 12

5.6 Inserting an SD Memory Card ....................................................................................................... 5 - 14

5.7 Starting up the SCREW TIGHTENING System............................................................................. 5 - 15

5.8 Language Setting........................................................................................................................... 5 - 16

5.9 Clock Setting.................................................................................................................................. 5 - 17

5.10 Logging in as a Local Manager...................................................................................................... 5 - 18

5.11 System Setting............................................................................................................................... 5 - 19

5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting ............................................................................................... 5 - 21

5.12.1 Electric screwdriver setting................................................................................................. 5 - 22

5.12.2 Screw shelf setting ............................................................................................................. 5 - 23

5.12.3 Terminal LED color setting ................................................................................................. 5 - 24

5.12.4 Writing start addresses...................................................................................................... 5 - 24

5.12.5 Reflecting to the system ..................................................................................................... 5 - 27

5.13 Electric Screwdriver Setting........................................................................................................... 5 - 28

5.14 RUN State Indicator Setting........................................................................................................... 5 - 30

6. OPERATION CHECK

6.1 Checking with the Inspection Function ............................................................................................ 6 - 1

6.1.1 Electric screwdriver inspection ............................................................................................. 6 - 1

6.1.2 Screw shelf inspection.......................................................................................................... 6 - 2

6.1.3 Other devices inspection ...................................................................................................... 6 - 3

6.2 Checking with the Alarm Function ................................................................................................... 6 - 4

6.2.1 Pop-up display...................................................................................................................... 6 - 4

6.2.2 Current alarms...................................................................................................................... 6 - 5

6.2.3 Alarm history......................................................................................................................... 6 - 6

6.3 Checking with the System Alarm Function ...................................................................................... 6 - 7

6.3.1 Pop-up display...................................................................................................................... 6 - 7

6.3.2 System alarm........................................................................................................................ 6 - 8

6.4 Checking with the Free Operation Function .................................................................................... 6 - 9

6.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 6 - 10

6.5.1 Troubleshooting by symptom ............................................................................................. 6 - 10

6.5.2 List of error messages ........................................................................................................ 6 - 15

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION

7.1 User Program .................................................................................................................................. 7 - 2

7.1.1 Specifications and restrictions .............................................................................................. 7 - 2

7.1.2 Adding a user program ......................................................................................................... 7 - 6

7.2 User Screen..................................................................................................................................... 7 - 7

7.2.1 Specifications and restrictions .............................................................................................. 7 - 7

7.2.2 Adding a user screen............................................................................................................ 7 - 8

A - 7

7.3 Torque Check (Sample)................................................................................................................. 7 - 19

7.4 Externally Connected Electric Screwdriver .................................................................................... 7 - 24

7.5 Coordinated Production with External Devices Function............................................................... 7 - 26

APPENDICESAppendix.1 Specifications of the Programmable Controller App- 1

Appendix.1.1 General specifications..................................................................................................App- 1

Appendix.1.2 Specification of the CPU module .................................................................................App- 2

Appendix.1.3 Battery replacement procedure....................................................................................App- 7

Appendix.1.4 Specifications of the power supply module..................................................................App- 8

Appendix.1.5 Specifications of the END cover ................................................................................App- 10

Appendix.1.6 Specifications of the AnyWireASLINK master module...............................................App- 12

Appendix.1.7 Specifications of the output module ...........................................................................App- 15

Appendix.1.8 Specifications of the DC I/O conversion module........................................................App- 17

Appendix.1.9 Specifications of the connection cable for the DC I/O conversion module ................App- 18

Appendix.2 Specifications of the GOT App- 20

Appendix.2.1 General specifications................................................................................................App- 20

Appendix.2.2 Specifications of the GT2715-XTBA ..........................................................................App- 21

Appendix.2.3 Specifications of the GT2512-STBA ..........................................................................App- 24

Appendix.2.4 Battery replacement procedure..................................................................................App- 27

Appendix.3 Restoration Function App- 29

Appendix.3.1 Creating restoration data ...........................................................................................App- 29

Appendix.3.2 Restoration.................................................................................................................App- 30

Appendix.4 Devices Disclosed to Users App- 32

Appendix.4.1 M device.....................................................................................................................App- 32

Appendix.4.2 D device .....................................................................................................................App- 37

Appendix.5 External Interface App- 52

Appendix.5.1 List of interfaces.........................................................................................................App- 52

Appendix.5.2 Details of external interfaces......................................................................................App- 53

Appendix.5.3 Operation image ........................................................................................................App- 67

A - 8

RELEVANT MANUALS

(1) SCREW TIGHTENING Application

(2) Programmable controller-related manuals

(3) GOT-related manuals

Manual name Description

iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING

Startup Manual (Database)

<BCN-EP2005-0011>

Information on the procedures for starting up and setting a database server required to

construct a database for the SCREW TIGHTENING Application

iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING

Operating Manual

<BCN-EP2005-0012>

Information on the procedures, system configurations, functions, and troubleshooting

of the SCREW TIGHTENING Application

iQ Monozukuri SCR Information editing Tool

Instruction Manual

<BCN-EP2005-0017>

Information on how to use the SCR Information editing Tool required to set the system

and database of the SCREW TIGHTENING Application

Manual name Description

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual

(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)

<SH-080889ENG, 13JZ35>

Information on the functions and devices of the CPU module and programming

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual

(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

<SH-080890ENG, 13JZ36>

Information on the specifications of the hardware, such as CPU modules and power

supply modules, maintenance and inspection of the system, and troubleshooting

required to use LCPU

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual

(Built-In Ethernet Function)

<SH-080891ENG, 13JZ37>

Information on the Ethernet function of the CPU module

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual

(Built-In I/O Function)

<SH-080892ENG, 13JZ38>

Information on the general-purpose I/O functions, interrupt input function, pulse catch

function, positioning function, and high-speed counter function of the CPU module

MELSEC-L I/O Module User's Manual

<SH-080888ENG, 13JZ34>Information on the specifications and troubleshooting of the I/O module

MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's

Manual

<SH-081094ENG, 13JZ70>

Functions and programming of the LJ51AW12AL AnyWireASLINK master module

MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual

(Common Instruction)

<SH-080809ENG, 13JW10>

Usage of sequence instructions, basic instructions, and application instructions for the

L series

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual

(Common)

<SH-080779ENG, 13JU63>

Functions that are common to simple projects and structured projects, including

system configuration, parameter settings, and operation methods for online functions

of GX Works2

Manual name Description

GOT2000 Series User's Manual

(Hardware)

<SH-081194ENG, 1D7MJ5>

Hardware details of the GOT2000 series, such as specifications, wiring, installation,

and maintenance

GOT2000 Series User's Manual

(Utility)

<SH-081195ENG, 1D7MJ6>

Information on the functions of the GOT2000 series, such as the GOT basic setting,

extended function setting, maintenance, monitoring, and data control that can be set or

operated on each utility screen

GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual For GT

Works3 Version1

<SH-081228ENG>

Information on the specifications and settings of the MES interface function of

GOT2000 series

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

<SH-081220ENG, 1D7ML9>Basic operations for drawing, data transfer, and common settings in GT Designer3

A - 9

(4) FA Integrated Software-related manuals

(5) Manuals of products manufactured by Anywire CorporationRefer to the product manual supplied with the product used.

(6) Barcode reader-related manual

(a) Manuals of products manufactured by DENSO WAVE INCORPORATEDRefer to the product manual supplied with the product used.Or download the corresponding manual PDF from the website of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.

www.denso-wave.com

(b) Manuals of products manufactured by Cognex CorporationRefer to the product manual supplied with the product used.Or download the corresponding manual PDF from the website of Cognex Corporation.

www.cognex.com

(7) Electric screwdriver-related manual

(a) Manuals of products manufactured by NITTO KOHKI CO., LTD.Refer to the product manual supplied with the product used.Or download the corresponding manual PDF from the website of NITTO KOHKI CO.,LTD.

www.nitto-kohki.co.jp/e(For electric screwdrivers interlocking with other FA devices, contact NITTO KOHKI CO., LTD. from the above website.)

Manual name Description

iQ AppPortal Installation Instructions

<BCN-P5999-0635>Information on the operating environment and installation procedure of iQ AppPortal

iQ AppPortal Operating Manual

<SH-081623ENG>Information on the functions and how to use of iQ AppPortal

A - 10

REFERENCE MANUALS BY PURPOSE

The following table lists the reference manuals for the SCREW TIGHTENING Application by purpose.

: Detailed description, : Overview only, Empty: No description

*1 Select and refer to the manuals that describe the corresponding functions/products among the programmable controller-related

manuals.

*2 Select and refer to the manuals that describe the corresponding functions/products among the GOT-related manuals.

*3 Select and refer to the manuals that describe the corresponding functions/products among the AnyWire product manuals.

*4 Select and refer to the manuals that describe the corresponding functions/products among the barcode reader-related manuals.

*5 Select and refer to the manuals that describe the corresponding functions/products among the electric screwdriver-related

manuals.

Purpose

iQ Monozukuri SCREW

TIGHTENING Startup

Manual (System)

iQ Monozukuri SCREW

TIGHTENING Startup

Manual (Database)

iQ Monozukuri SCR

Information editing Tool

Instruction Manual

iQ Monozukuri SCREW

TIGHTENING

Operating Manual

When users want to know the entire system

configuration

When users want to know all functions of the

system

When users want to know the startup procedure of

the system

When users want to know the control panel *1

When users want to know the programmable

controller system*1

When users want to know the operation panel *2

When users want to know GOTs *2

When users want to know POKAYOKE terminals *3

When users want to know address writers *3

When users want to know AnyWireASLINK *1, *3

When users want to know barcode readers *4

When users want to know electric screwdrivers *5

When users want to know other devices

When users want to know the personal computer

for database server

When users want to know the database

When users want to know the personal computer

for the tool

When users want to know the SCR Information

editing Tool

When users want to know assembly work step

instructions

When users want to know the GOT MES interface

function*2

When users want to know user customization *1, *2

When users want to know the backup/restoration

function*2

When users want to know screen operations

When users want to know maintenance and

inspections*1, *2, *3, *4, *5

A - 11

TERMS

Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.

Term Description

SCREW TIGHTENING Application A generic term for the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package and system devices

SCREW TIGHTENING System The abbreviation for the system constructed with the SCREW TIGHTENING Application

SCR Information editing ToolA tool used to create assembly work step instructions, files for the database, and data for GOTs required to start up

and operate the SCREW TIGHTENING System

AnyWireASLINKA system in which sensors at the ends of a control system are connected to a programmable controller in the optimal

way

AnyWireASLINK master module A module used to connect the AnyWireASLINK system to the programmable controller and control the system

ASLINKER A terminal used to connect devices that have no AnyWireASLINK interfaces to the AnyWireASLINK system

ASLINK connected device A generic term for the devices that have AnyWireASLINK interfaces

ASLINK address auto recognition This function automatically recognizes the address of each ASLINK connected device.

ASLINK transmission cable A cable that has signal wires to connect ASLINK connected device

ASLINK-compatible electric

screwdriverA generic term for screwdrivers that have AnyWireASLINK interfaces and are powered by electricity

Non ASLINK-compatible electric

screwdriver

A generic term for screwdrivers that have no AnyWireASLINK interfaces and are powered by electricity

(In this system, ASLINKER is used to connect these electric screwdrivers to the AnyWireASLINK system.)

ASLINK connected electric

screwdriver

A generic term for ASLINK-compatible electric screwdrivers and non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdrivers.

This system determines the acceptance of screw tightening from the time taken from the detection of the start signal to

the detection of the torque-up signal of the electric screwdriver.

Externally connected electric

screwdriver

A generic term for electric screwdrivers that are connected by a method other than ASLINK connection.

Electric screwdrivers determine the acceptance of screw tightening.

Electric screwdriver A generic term for ASLINK connected electric screwdrivers and externally connected electric screwdrivers

Elec. driver The abbreviation for electric screwdrivers

Manual screwdriver A generic term for manual screwdrivers

Manu. driver The abbreviation for manual screwdrivers

POKAYOKE terminal A generic term for terminals that have AnyWireASLINK interfaces and used for picking work

Address A number used by the AnyWireASLINK master module to identify each device on AnyWireASLINK

Address writer A handy device used to read or write addresses and parameters from/to ASLINK connected devices

Barcode readerA generic term for handy scanners manufactured by DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED and barcode readers

manufactured by Cognex Corporation.

System alarm A generic term for CPU errors, GOT errors, and network errors issued by GOTs

Alarm A generic term for errors other than system alarms issued by this system

Severe alarmA generic term for alarms and system alarms that interrupt the operation and require restart of the system to restore

the system

Medium alarmA generic term for alarms and system alarms that interrupt the operation but do not require restart of the system to

restore the system

Minor alarm A generic term for alarms and system alarms that allow the operation to continue

StandbyIn this state, assembly work is not being performed.

(Assembly work in the free operation mode is performed in the Waiting state.)

Operating In this state, assembly work on the Assembly work step window is being performed.

Stopped In this state, measurement of work time on the Assembly work step window has stopped.

Cell production methodOnly this system is used to produce products in this method.

(No external systems coordinate with this system.)

Line production method 1

In this method, this system receives an order number from the external system and products are manufactured

according to the information registered with the order No.

(This system manages production plans.)

Line production method 2

In this method, this system receives a control number from the external system and a corresponding product is

manufactured.

(The external system manages production plans.)

Coordinated operation mode In this mode, the operation coordinates with the external system.

Single operation mode In this mode, the operation is performed without coordination with the external system.

Assembly work step instructions Assembly manual created with the SCR Information editing Tool

A - 12

Operator A type of users who can perform operations and configure settings required for work input and assembly

ManagerA type of users who can configure system settings besides the operations and settings that can be performed and

configured by operators

Local manager A type of users who can configure system settings without connections to the database

Start signal A signal to be output from an electric screwdriver while it is rotating

Torque-up signal A signal to be output from an electric screwdriver while its torque is being amplified

Reverse signal A signal to be output from an electric screwdriver while it is reversing

Screw tightening process A work step for tightening screws with electric screwdrivers or manual screwdrivers

Screw loosening process A work step for loosening tightened screws with electric screwdrivers or manual screwdrivers

Screw retightening process A work step for retightening tightened screws with manual screwdrivers

Screen touching process A step of touching the screen after completion of work

Marking check process A work step for checking and marking products

Parts take-out process A work step for taking out parts from screw shelves

External InputAn external switch on the "Assembly work step" window used to proceed the process without touching switches on the

GOT screen

Screw tightening OK In this state, screw tightening has been normally completed.

Screw tightening NG In this state, screw tightening has not been normally completed.

RUN state indicator A three-color stack light that indicates the operating state of this system

Indicator for screw tightening check A two-color stack light that indicates if the screw tightening process has succeeded or failed

Indicator light A generic term for RUN state indicators and indicators for screw tightening check

OK buzzer

This buzzer sounds in the following cases.

• When screw tightening is OK

• At completion of work for one item

• At completion of assembly work for one product

NG buzzer

This buzzer sounds in the following cases.

• When screw tightening is NG

• When a torque-up signal has not been detected after 10 seconds or longer from the start of the forward rotation of

an electric screwdriver

• When an electric screwdriver rotates in the forward rotation during screw loosening process

• When an error has occurred in the communication with the database

Assembly work step information A generic term for screw tightening work information obtained from the database when an order No. is input

Screw information A generic term for information used at the screw box verification

Screw tightening informationA generic term for information of screws used for each work item in assembly work

(screw type, screw code, number of screws)

Screw tightening time information A generic term for information of screw tightening time per screw

Screw tightening OK data informationA generic term for information that is sent to the database when screw tightening is OK in assembly work

(work date and screw tightening time)

Screw tightening NG data informationA generic term for information that is sent to the database when screw tightening is NG in assembly work

(work date and screw tightening time)

Work start informationA generic term for information that is sent to the database when assembly work for one product is started in assembly

work

Work record informationA generic term for information that is sent to the database when assembly work for one product is completed in

assembly work

Item completion information

A generic term for information that is sent to the database when assembly work for one item is completed in assembly

work

(work start date, work start time, work completion date, and work completion time)

Work completion information

A generic term for information that is sent to the database when assembly work for one product is completed in

assembly work

(work start date, work start time, work completion date, and work completion time)

Work pause informationA generic term for information that is sent to the database when an operator selected to forcibly stop assembly work

(pause start date, pause start time, pause end date, and pause end time)

Work retry informationA generic term for information that is sent to the database when an operator selected to retry assembly work

(pause start date, pause start time, pause end date, and pause end time)

Torque check information A generic term for information that is sent to the database at torque check.

Electric screwdriver type Model information of an electric screwdriver or a bit attached on the edge of the electric screwdriver

Term Description

A - 13

Electric screwdriver codeThis identification code is used to identify an electric screwdriver or a bit attached on the edge of the electric

screwdriver.

Screw type Model information for a screw

Screw code This identification code is used to identify screws.

Screw color Display color of a screw No. lamp

Image templateAn excel file (template) of image data to be used in assembly work step instructions. Import this file to the assembly

work step instructions.

Factory ID This identification ID is used to identify a factory in work sites

Equipment ID This identification ID is used to identify equipment in the factory

Work table ID This identification ID is used to identify a work table in the equipment

Operator ID This identification ID is used to identify an operator.

Skill This item shows the degree of the operator's skill. Select one from "Ordinary" and "Skillful".

Manager A type of operators. Select one from "Operator" or "Manager".

Order No. This identification number is used to identify a control number, planned quantity, and assembly manual sub number.

Control No. This identification number is used to identify a model.

ID No. This identification number is used to identify a manufactured product.

Planned quantity Number of parts to be manufactured.

Completed parts The number of completed parts to the planned quantity.

Manual No. This identification number is used to identify an assembly manual.

Manual sub No. Revision number of the assembly manual

Image dataGOT image data included in assembly work step instructions

Create this data with assembly work step instructions and send it to GOTs.

Comment dataGOT comment data included in assembly work step instructions

Create this data with assembly work step instructions and send it to GOTs.

Data for GOTs A generic term for image data and comment data

Address area

Address area of AnyWireASLINK occupied by this system

For electric screwdrivers, 0 to 39 are occupied. (Four addresses are required for each electric screwdriver.)

For screw shelves, 40 to 189 are occupied. (Five addresses are required for each screw shelf.)

Address mismatchIn this state, the address of an ASLINK connected device connected to the AnyWireASLINK master module and the

address set in the settings of this system are not consistent.

Unauthorized address deviceAmong the ASLINK connected devices connected to the AnyWireASLINK master module, this device has an address

other than the addresses set for this system.

User screen A generic term for screen data added by the user customization function

User program A generic term for sequence programs added by the user customization function

User device Devices that users can freely use at the user customization of this system

Devices disclosed to users

Among the devices occupied by this system, the applications of these devices are disclosed to users.

Users can access the devices disclosed to users from user programs and refer to information of the system and

perform some operations on this system.

Term Description

A - 14

REQUESTING AND REGISTERING A LICENSE KEY

To use the "SCREW TIGHTENING Application", register a license key to the CPU module.Before starting up the system, follow the "License Key Request Instructions" supplied with the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package to get a license key.

(1) The following information is required to request a license key.

• Application information (product name, model, and product ID)This information is described in the "License Certificate" supplied with the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package.

• Hardware information (model and serial number)The model and serial number of the CPU module to be used. For how to check the serial number, refer to the following.

3.4.4 Checking serial number and function version

(2) Register the license key to the CPU module at the installation of a sequence program.

For the details, refer to the following.

5.2 Installing Sequence Programs

(3) Attach the "iQ Monozukuri seal" on the CPU module for which a license key has been registered.

• The "iQ Monozukuri seal" is supplied with the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package.

• For the position to attach the seal, refer to the following.

Position where the seal is attached(On the top of the CPU module)

A - 15

A - 16

1

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

1. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION

This chapter describes the entire system configuration for constructing a SCREW TIGHTENING System using the SCREW TIGHTENING Application.

1.1 Entire System Configuration

The following figure shows an image of the SCREW TIGHTENING System constructed with this application.

SY

ST

EM

CO

This application consists of the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package, programmable controllers, GOTs, a database server, and electric screwdrivers.

The SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package contains the software library (sequence program, screen data, SCR Information editing Tool, and manuals).

Personal computer for database server

Personal computer for the tool

• Electric screwdriver information• Screw information, etc.

• Operation history data• Completed parts, etc.

Ethernet

Work table A

Work table B Work table C

••••

Assembly work step instructions

Management department

Production department

Creating assembly work step instructions

• Order No.• Planned qty• Model/type, etc.

1. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION1.1 Entire System Configuration

1 - 1

The following figure shows the entire system configuratio

1 - 2 1. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION1.1 Entire System Configuration

f this application.

n o

POINTPOINTPOINT

For the details of each device, refer to the following.

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Personal computer for database server

Personal computer for the tool

Ethernet

•••••

Control panel

Input switch Buzzer

RS-232GOT

Ethernet

AnyWireASLINK

Barcode reader

RS-232

ASLINK filter

24 V DC power supply

POKAYOKE terminal

AnyWireASLINK

Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

ASLINK-compatible

electric screwdriver

Non ASLINK-

compatible electric

screwdriver

Work table A

ASLINKER

Programmable controller system

Terminal block

Operation panel

Three-color stack light

Two-color stack light

Work table B

Work table C

Power supply box

1

1.1.1 Software and database components

The following figure shows software and database components of this application.

SY

ST

EM

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

*1 Create for each manual (sub) number.

*2 System common master files (operator information master file, order No. information master file)

*3 Work instruction master files (work instruction information master file, specified time master file, work process master file)

*4 GOT data (image data, comment data)

*5 Transfer GOT data to work tables with one of the following two methods.

• Transferring data from the computer to the SD memory card inserted in each GOT by Ethernet• Transferring data to the SD memory card inserted in the computer and then inserting the SD memory card in each GOT

POINTPOINTPOINT

For details of software and database components, refer to the following.

iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING Startup Manual (Database)

iQ Monozukuri SCR Information editing Tool Instruction Manual

Personal computer for database server

Database

SCR Information editing Tool

Personal computer for the tool

Assembly work step instructions

Work table CWork table BWork table A

SD memory card

Insert InsertInsert

Transfer

Transfer

Transfer

Create

Create

Create

*5

*5

Ethernet

Import

••••••

••••••

••••••

••••••

Files for database

*1

*1

*2

*3

Create*1

Data for GOTs*4

••••••

System common master file

Work instruction master file

Transfer data via FTP

1. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION1.1 Entire System Configuration

1 - 3

1 - 4 1. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION1.2 Data and Signal Exchanges

1.2 Data and Signal Exchanges

The following figure shows an overview of data and signal exchanges among modules.

POINTPOINTPOINT

For the details of data and signal exchanges, refer to the following.

3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANEL

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES

Personal computer for database server

Input switch

Buzzer

GOT

Barcode reader

POKAYOKE terminal

ASLINK-compatible

electric screwdriver

Non ASLINK-

compatible electric

screwdriver

CPU module

AnyWireASLINK master module

Output module

<Barcode>

<Image/comment data> <Work instructions>

<Production volume>

<Screen operation>

<ON/flashing command>

<Buzzer sound>

<Input signal>

<Signal detection>

<Control signal>

<Output signal>

<Terminal control>

00

00

-00

00

-00

ab

cd

ef

00

00

-00

00

-00

OF

F

RU

N

ON

ST

AR

T

oo

oo

o

oo

00

00

-00

00

-00

ab

cd

ef

00

00

-00

00

-00

OF

F

RU

N

ON

ST

AR

T

oo

oo

o

oo

Personal computer for the tool

<Screen display command>

Three-color stack light

Two-color stack light

<Electric screwdriver control>

<Power supply output>

1

SY

ST

EM

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

1.3 Operating Environment

This application requires personal computers for a database server and the tool.

(1) Operating environment of a personal computer (The environments not specified below are unsupported.)

*1 Used for browsing manuals.

*2 Used for the SCR Information editing Tool and the restoration function of the GOT.

*3 Used for the backup function of the GOT.

*4 Required only for the personal computer for database server.

*5 Used to install and customize sequence programs.

*6 Used to install and customize screen data.

(2) System requirements for OSs

Personal computerA personal computer capable of running the following OSs (For system requirements of the OSs, refer

to (2).)

OS

Windows® 8.1 (Operating System, Pro Operating System, Enterprise Operating System)

Windows® 8 (Operating System, Pro Operating System, Enterprise Operating System)

Windows® 7 (Professional Operating System, Ultimate Operating System, Enterprise Operating

System)

Disk drive DVD drive*1*2

InterfaceSD memory card*2 SDHC-compliant

USB*3 USB1.1 or later

Database management

systemMicrosoft® SQL Server®*4 SQL Server® 2012 Express

Application

MELSOFT GX Works2*5 Version 1.555D or later

MELSOFT GT Designer3 (GOT2000)*6 Version 1.155M or later

Microsoft® Excel®*2 Excel® 2010, Excel® 2013

Application (recommended) Adobe® Reader®*1

CAUTIONThe maximum size of the database for SQL Server 2012 Express is 10 GB (10,240 MB).Manage data in the database not to exceed the maximum size.

OS CPU Memory Disk space

Windows® 8.1, Windows® 8, Windows® 764 bits

1 GHz or more2 GB or more Free space: 20 GB or more

32 bits 1 GB or more Free space: 16 GB or more

1. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION1.3 Operating Environment

1 - 5

1 - 6 1. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION1.4 Steps Before Operation

1.4 Steps Before Operation

The following figure shows the steps required to construct the SCREW TIGHTENING System with this application.For the details of each process, refer to the corresponding pages.

CAUTION Before wiring and installing devices, always power off the system.

Design a system.

Build a control panel and an operation panel.

Ethernet connection

ODBC setting

Set the DB connection service.

Generate a database.

Wire the control panel and operation panel.

Install sequence programs.

Install a programmable controller and others in the control panel.

Install GOTs and others in the operation panel.

Install the control panel and operation panel at a work table.

Install electric screwdrivers and POKAYOKE terminals at

the work table.

Wire the electric screwdrivers and POKAYOKE terminals.

Install other devices at the work table.

Import the files for the database.

Install the DB connection service.

Install screen data.

Register a license of the GOT MES interface function.

Start up the system.

Start up the personal computer for the tool.

Transfer data for GOTs.

Create assembly work step instructions.

Create files for the database and data for GOTs.

Start up the personal computer for the database

server.

iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING

Startup Manual (Database)

3.1 Layout Example

3.2 Circuit Design Example

3.3 Building a Control Panel

and Operation Panel

3.4 Installing a

Programmable

Controller System

3.5 Installing a GOT

3.6 Wiring the Control

Panel and Operation

Panel

4.1 Installing the Control

Panel and Operation Panel

4.2 Installing Barcode

Readers

4.3 Installing Electric

Screwdrivers

4.4 Installing POKAYOKE

Terminals

4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK

4.6 Installing Other External

Signal I/O Devices

4.7 Ethernet Connection

5.1 Starting up the Programmable

Controller

5.4 Installing Screen Data

5.5 Registering a License of the

GOT MES Interface Function

5.6 Inserting an SD Memory

Card

iQ Monozukuri SCR Information

editing Tool Instruction Manual

5.2 Installing Sequence Programs

5.3 Starting up the GOT

1

SY

ST

EM

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

Turn on the power.

Set the display language and clock.

Register each information.

Configure the RUN state indicator setting.

Configure the electric screwdriver setting.

Configure the ASLINK setting.

Inspection

Test operation

Delivery of the system

Has an error occurred?

No

YesTroubleshooting

Start up the system.

5.7 Starting up the SCREW TIGHTENING System

5.8 Language Setting

5.9 Clock Setting

5.11 System Setting

5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting

5.13 Electric Screwdriver Setting

5.14 RUN State Indicator Setting

6.1 Checking with the Inspection Function

6.2 Checking with the Alarm Function

6.4 Checking with the Free Operation Function

6.5 Troubleshooting

5.10 Logging in as a Local Manager

1

. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION1.4 Steps Before Operation

1 - 7

1 - 8 1. SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION1.4 Steps Before Operation

2

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

N

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

This chapter describes the system devices used in the SCREW TIGHTENING Application.

2.1 List of System Devices

The following tables list the system devices of this application.

2.1.1 Products in the iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package

Check that all the products in the following table are included in a package.For quantities, refer to "Before Using the Product" (BCN-EP2005-0004) included in the package.

SY

ST

EM

CO

Component Model Manufacturer Remarks

Before Using the Product BCN-EP2005-0004

Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation

END-USER SOFTWARE LICENSE

AGREEMENTBCN-EP2005-0001

License Certificate BKO-CF2015H**

A number that comes in ** of "H**" depends on the

number of purchased licenses.

• 1 license: H01

• 5 licenses: H02

• 10 licenses: H03

• 15 licenses: H04

• 20 licenses: H05

• 25 licenses: H06

License Key Request Instructions BCN-EP2005-0002 REQUESTING AND REGISTERING A

LICENSE KEYiQ Monozukuri seal BD996D089

Installation DVD

AP10-SCRAA-DVD 2.2 Files in DVD-ROM

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION2.1 List of System Devices

2 - 1

2 - 2 2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION2.1 List of System Devices

2.1.2 Product to be prepared by users

Purchase the following products.

Component Model Manufacturer Remarks

Power supply module

Select one of the

following.

• L61P

• L63P

• L63SP

Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation

CPU module Select one of the

following.

• L02CPU

• L02CPU-P

• L06CPU

• L06CPU-P

• L26CPU

• L26CPU-P

• L26CPU-BT

• L26CPU-PBT

Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation

Use the module with a serial number (first five digits)

of "18102" or later.

3.4.4 Checking serial number and function

version

AnyWireASLINK master module

LJ51AW12ALMitsubishi Electric

CorporationFor connection to the AnyWireASLINK system

Output module

LY40NT5PMitsubishi Electric

Corporation

Output 16 points

(10.2 V DC to 28.8 V DC)

SD memory card

Select one of the

following.

• NZ1MEM-2GBSD

• NZ1MEM-4GBSD

• NZ1MEM-8GBSD

• NZ1MEM-16GBSD

Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation

For reading image data and comment data created

with the SCR Information editing Tool

Connection cable for DC I/O conversion

module

FA-SCBL10FMV-M

Mitsubishi Electric

Engineering Company

Limited.

For connection between a MELSEC-LCPU built-in I/O

connector and a connector/terminal block converter

module

Length: 1 m

2

SY

ST

EM

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

N

DC I/O conversion module

FA-TBS40P

Mitsubishi Electric

Engineering Company

Limited.

General-purpose screw terminal for wiring external I/O

devices

GOT

Select one of the

following.

• GT2715-XTBA

• GT2512-STBA

Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation

Operation panel for SCREW TIGHTENING

Application

• GT2715-XTBA: XGA (15 inches)

• GT2512-STBA: SVGA (12 inches)

License of the GOT MES interface

functionGT25-MESIFKEY

Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation

ASLINKER

BL287SB-02F-CC20

Anywire Corporation

Two point inputs

(NPN type)

ASLINKER

BL287XB-02F-CC20One point input, one point output

(NPN type)

POKAYOKE terminal

(1)POKAYOKE

terminal modelsAnywire Corporation

Up to 30 terminals can be connected in this

application.

φ28 pipe installation fitting for a

transparent type terminal

A027-T14PHP28-H1

Anywire Corporation

For installing transparent type picking sensors (14 cm)

A027-T07PHP28-H1 For installing transparent type picking sensors (7 cm)

Protective fitting-free mounting screw set

(five screws)A027-TSM4-5P

Mounting screws for transparent type picking sensor

fittings

Cable with connectors on both ends A0102-CND-**

Anywire Corporation

For connecting ultracompact touch type terminals

each other

(A number that comes in ** depends on the length of

the cable used.)

Transmission cable A0102-CNE-20 For ultracompact touch type terminals

Wiring duct A092-DM For installing ultracompact touch type terminals

[H] holder

φ28 pipe installation holder lower

tightening type

(including 5 pieces)

A027-HP28-5P

Anywire Corporation

A holder attached to a terminal depends on the type of

the terminal used. Use the proper holder depending

on the pipe.

For details, refer to the product manual supplied with

the product used.

[H1] holder

φ28 pipe installation holder back

tightening type

(including 5 pieces)

A027-HP28-H1-5P

[SUS] holder

SUS pipe installation holderA027-HP-SUS2

Component Model Manufacturer Remarks

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION2.1 List of System Devices

2 - 3

Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

BT0 Anywire Corporation Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

4-core flat cable

FK4-125-100 Anywire CorporationTransmission cable for AnyWireASLINK (100 m per

roll)

Insulation displacement connector

LP4-WR-10P

Anywire Corporation

LP connector for AnyWireASLINK

(For FK4-125-100)

LP4-WW-10P

LP connector for AnyWireASLINK

(For ASLINKER and ultracompact touch type

terminals)

24 V DC power supply - -90 W (input: 85 to 265 V AC, output: 24 V DC, 3.8 A)

Example: KHNA90F-24 (COSEL CO.,LTD.)

ASLINK filter

ANF-01 Anywire Corporation For 24 V DC

Address writer

ARW-02AS Anywire CorporationAddress writer for setting addresses of ASLINKER

and POKAYOKE terminals

Insulation displacement tool for LP

connector

LP-TOOL Anywire CorporationFor tool exclusive to insulation displacement

connectors (LP4-WR-10P, LP4-WW-10P)

ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver

(2)Electric

screwdriver interlocking

with other FA device

NITTO KOHKI CO.,

LTD.

Up to 10 electric screwdrivers can be connected in

this application.Non ASLINK-compatible electric

screwdriver

(3)Electric

screwdrivers with screw

tightening counter

NITTO KOHKI CO.,

LTD.

SPC conversion code -NITTO KOHKI CO.,

LTD.

Required to use SPC type electric screwdrivers as

standard type ones.

Component Model Manufacturer Remarks

(This figure shows LP4-WR-10P.)

24V0V

PO

WE

R IN

24V0V

SL

AV

E

12

34

MODE DATA

R W

MODESELECT

POWERCLEAR

POWERFLICK

EX

SENSE

TIME

COLOR

CLOSE

ADR

OPEN

2 - 4 2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION2.1 List of System Devices

2

SY

ST

EM

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

N

Electric screwdriver connector RM12BRD-7SHIROSE ELECTRIC

CO., LTD.

For separating power signals of electric screwdrivers

Required for the number of electric screwdrivers (I/O

lines)

Terminal block - - -

Relay - -

For power control of electric screwdrivers

Required for the number of electric screwdrivers

Example: G3RV (OMRON)

Barcode reader• AT26Q-SM(R)

• AT21Q-SM(R)

(Body color: Black)

DENSO WAVE

INCORPORATED

Wired type (RS-232C)

[Accessories]

• Interface cable

• AC adapter• AT25Q-SM(R)

• AT20Q-SM(R)

(Body color: White)

Barcode reader

DMR-8050-0100

Cognex Corporation

Wired type

DM100-PWR-000 24 V DC power supply

DM8000-RS232-02 RS-232 cable (5 m)

Personal computer for database server - - For the operating environment for the personal

computers, refer to the following.

1.3 Operating EnvironmentPersonal computer for the tool - -

Ethernet hub - -For connecting CPU modules, GOTs, personal

computer for database server, and Ethernet hubsEthernet cable

(Twisted pair cable with shields)- -

Ferrite core - -

For Ethernet cables

Example: ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK Corporation)

or a ferrite core having equivalent damping

characteristics

External power supply - - -

Noise filter - -

For external power supply

Example: RSHN-2003 (TDK-Lambda Corporation)

or a ferrite core having equivalent damping

characteristics

Surge protection device - - -

Component Model Manufacturer Remarks

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION2.1 List of System Devices

2 - 5

2 - 6 2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION2.1 List of System Devices

(1) POKAYOKE terminal models

Product name Model

Lever switch type terminal (Selection of one color from seven colors) BL227XB-K02V-P

Pushbutton switch type terminal (Selection of one color from seven colors) BL227XB-K02VN-P

Lever switch type terminal (RGB each color independent ON/OFF) BL227XB-K06M-P

Pushbutton switch type terminal (RGB each color independent ON/OFF) BL227XB-K06MN-P

LED indication:

Stationery type

Photoelectric transmission type (Dust-proof: 140 mm long, selection of one color

from seven colors)

BL227PB-T14P02V-P (light emission)

BL227XB-T14P02V-C (light reception)

LED indication:

Stationery type

Photoelectric transmission type (Dust-proof: 70 mm short, selection of one color

from seven colors)

BL227PB-T07P02V-P (light emission)

BL227XB-T07P02V-C (light reception)

Door opening/closing

+ LED indication: Stationary type

Lever switch type

Detection function of forcibly open

selection of one color from seven colors

BL227XB-F04V-P

Small door type terminal, 2-point output type (with break open detection function,

horizontal metal arm, RGB each color independent ON/OFF)BL227XB-R2K08MN-P

Ultracompact touch type terminal (Selection of one color from seven colors) B292XB-02VL

(2) Electric screwdriver interlocking with other FA device

Model Remarks

DLV30LL-ASL(DJE) Lever start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 650 rpm

DLV30SL-ASL(DJE) Lever start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 1200 rpm

DLV30HL-ASL(DJE) Lever start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 2000 rpm

DLV45LL-ASL(DKE) Lever start, 2.0 to 4.5 N•m, 650 rpm

DLV45SL-ASL(DKE) Lever start, 2.0 to 4.5 N•m, 1200 rpm

DLV70LL-ASL(DKE) Lever start, 3.8 to 7.0 N•m, 650 rpm

DLV30LP-ASL(DJE) Push to start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 650 rpm

DLV30SP-ASL(DJE) Push to start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 1200 rpm

DLV30HP-ASL(DJE) Push to start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 2000 rpm

DLV45LP-ASL(DKE) Push to start, 2.0 to 4.5 N•m, 650 rpm

DLV45SP-ASL(DKE) Push to start, 2.0 to 4.5 N•m, 1200 rpm

DLV70LP-ASL(DKE) Push to start, 3.8 to 7.0 N•m, 650 rpm

(3) Electric screwdrivers with screw tightening counter

Model Remarks

DLV30LL-SPC Lever start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 650 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV30SL-SPC Lever start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 1200 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV30HL-SPC Lever start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 2000 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV45LL-SPC Lever start, 2.0 to 4.5 N•m, 650 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV45SL-SPC Lever start, 2.0 to 4.5 N•m, 1200 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV70LL-SPC Lever start, 3.8 to 7.0 N•m, 650 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV30LP-SPC Push to start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 650 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV30SP-SPC Push to start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 1200 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV30HP-SPC Push to start, 1.2 to 3.0 N•m, 2000 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV45LP-SPC Push to start, 2.0 to 4.5 N•m, 650 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV45SP-SPC Push to start, 2.0 to 4.5 N•m, 1200 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

DLV70LP-SPC Push to start, 3.8 to 7.0 N•m, 650 rpm, 100 V AC specifications

2.1.3 Product to be prepared by users (depends on the system configuration)

Purchase the following products according to the system configuration.

2

SY

ST

EM

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

N

2.1.4 Precautions for use

(1) Always insert a filter (ANF-01) between the AnyWireASLINK master module and the cables that supply drive power (24 V DC, 0 V) to the module.

(2) When installing the filter, connect the LINE side (Terminal 1 and 2) of the filter to the terminal, and connect the LOAD side (Terminal 3 and 4) to the power supply.

(3) Connect one terminator in one AnyWireASLINK master module system, and at the cable end farthest from the module.

(4) For the total length of transmission cables, refer to the following.

4.5.1 Precautions for wiring

(5) Up to 30 POKAYOKE terminals can be connected to one AnyWireASLINK master module in this system.

(6) The maximum connectable number of terminals is limited not only by the maximum connectable number of AnyWireASLINK master modules but also by the supply current from an external power source.Do not allow the total current consumption of terminals to exceed the supply current from the external power source.

(7) Setting the arm (door) motion time to "0" (Delay time: 0 second) may cause operators' hands to be caught.Set the arm (door) motion time to "1" (Delay time: 1 second) or longer and adjust the door opening/closing position setting depending on the system in use.

(8) The number of colors output from a two-color stack light is limited to two (example: red and green).

(9) OUT0 to OUT6 and IN6 of the CPU module are exclusive to the indicator lights, buzzers, and external input switches of this system. Do not connect other devices to them.

Component Model Manufacturer Remarks

Two-color stack light - - Example: MPS-202-RG (PATLITE Corporation)

Three-color stack light - - Example: MPS-302-RYG (PATLITE Corporation)

Input switch - - -

Buzzer - - -

DIN rail - - -

Leakage breaker - - -

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION2.1 List of System Devices

2 - 7

2 - 8 2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION2.2 Files in DVD-ROM

2.2 Files in DVD-ROM

The following table describes the structure of the files in the "Installation DVD" supplied with the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package.

Folder File name

Description Required application

POINTPOINTPOINT

"MELSOFT iQ AppPortal" is the application integrated management software which manages assets, including projects and libraries, in a group for each purpose.Use this software to manage projects and related files for each application.

• For the operating environment and how to install the software, refer to the following.

iQ AppPortal Installation Instructions

• For the functions and how to use the software, refer to the following.

- AP10-SCR002AA.txtThis text file shows the version of the SCREW TIGHTENING

Application supported by this installation DVD.-

Manual

Chinese

bcnep20050013*.pdf

Manuals in Simplified Chinese

("*" indicates the version of each manual.)Adobe Reader

bcnep20050014*.pdf

bcnep20050015*.pdf

bcnep20050018*.pdf

readme.txt Details of the manuals -

English

bcnep20050010*.pdf

Manuals in English

("*" indicates the version of each manual.)Adobe Reader

bcnep20050011*.pdf

bcnep20050012*.pdf

bcnep20050017*.pdf

readme.txt Details of the manuals -

Japanese

bcnep20050007*.pdf

Manuals in Japanese

("*" indicates the version of each manual.)Adobe Reader

bcnep20050008*.pdf

bcnep20050009*.pdf

bcnep20050016*.pdf

readme.txt Details of the manuals -

Tools

SCRInfoSet - SCR Information editing Tool Microsoft® Excel®

SCRLicRegSupport - SCR license key registration support tool Microsoft® Excel®

SCRDbSupport - Database support Tool -

ServerSetting SCR_ServerSetting.sql Files for database server setting -

Project

AP10-SCR002AA-

L02_*.****.gxw

Project for L02CPU

(*.**** indicates the version of the project.)GX Works2

AP10-SCR002AA-

GT2715X_*.****.gtx

Project for GT2715-XTBA

(*.**** indicates the version of the project.)GT Designer3

AP10-SCR002AA-

GT2512S_*.****.gtx

Project for GT2512-STBA

(*.**** indicates the version of the project.)

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal -Installer for the application integrated management software

"MELSOFT iQ AppPortal"MELSOFT iQ AppPortal

iQ AppPortal Operating Manual

Installing "MELSOFT iQ AppPortal" stored in the installation DVD registers all the data included in this package to "iQ Monozukuri Folder" in "MELSOFT iQ AppPortal".The following data in the zip format is registered in "iQ Monozukuri Folder". Decompress the file to be used as needed.

• SCR Information editing Tool (SCRInfoSet.zip)• SCR license key registration support tool (SCRLicRegSupport.zip)• Database support Tool (SCRDbSupport.zip)• Files for database server setting (ServerSetting.zip)

3. DESIGNING CO

3

3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANEL

This chapter describes the procedure for building a control panel and an operation panel for the SCREW TIGHTENING Application.

DE

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

NE

L

3.1 Layout Example

The following figures show layout examples of the control panel and operation panel.

(1) Control panel

Main power supply Cable clamp for lead-in wireInstallation hole: 4-φ10 hole

Internal layout

Terminal layout

TE1

TE3

TE2

(Unit: mm)

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANEL3.1 Layout Example

3 - 1

3 - 2 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.1 Layout Example

(2) Operation panel

(a) When using the GT2715-XTBA

(b) When using the GT2512-STBA

(Unit: mm)

Installation hole: 4-φ6 hole

Internal layoutCable clamp for lead-in wireExternal input switch

Terminal layout

(φ22, green)IDEC: HW1B-M110G

(Unit: mm)

Installation hole: 4-φ6 hole

Internal layoutCable clamp for lead-in wireExternal input switch

Terminal layout

(φ22, green)IDEC: HW1B-M110G

ATION PANEL

3. DESIGNING CO

3.2 Circuit Design Example

The following figures show design examples of electrical circuits.

(1) Entire electrical circuit

Single-phase

3

DE

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

NE

L

*1 This is a power supply box for connecting non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdrivers. For a design example of an electrical

circuit in the power supply box, refer to the following.

(2) Power supply box for non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdrivers

100 to 240 V AC

NFB

CP1

CP2

GOT1

L +V

-V

P24V

24 V DC power supply

N24V

P24V

N24VN

GT2715-XTBA/GT2512-STBA

INPUT100-240 V AC

LG

FG

LINPUT100-240 V AC

N

LG

FGE

E

E

P24V

N24V

Ethernet

P24V

N24VExternal input switch

PLC1

L61P LJ51AW12ALL06CPU LY40NT5P

24 V0 VDPDNLG

Main power supply

CP4

TE1L N

E

RS-232

Ethernet

E

PS1TE2

CP3 CON2

E

AC adapter Barcode reader

P24V

N24VEthernet hub

HUB1

TE4

Ethernet

P24VN24V

FA-SCBL10FMV-M

P24V

External relayCR2

External relayCR1

24 V

0 V PENF1

ANF-01

FA-TBS40P

P24V

N24V

Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriverCR2

TE3

CR1

CON1

E

Three-color stack light

Two-color stack light

LowerMiddle

Upper

BuzzerGreen

Red

1

2

ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver

POKAYOKE terminal

POKAYOKE terminal

ASLINKER2 input 1, output 1

ASLINKER1 input 2

BlackRed

WhiteBrown

Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

*1

LED lamp

Black

Red

White

Brown

LY40NT5P18-point screw terminal block

BlackYellow

WhiteGreen

BlackYellow

WhiteGreen

BlackYellow

WhiteGreen

BlackYellow

WhiteGreen

BlackYellow

WhiteGreen

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANEL3.2 Circuit Design Example

3 - 3

3 - 4 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.2 Circuit Design Example

(2) Power supply box for non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdrivers

LED lamp

Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver

Electric screwdriver connector

1 2 3 4 5 6 PE

Blue Yellow White Orange Gray Black Green

Brown Black Blue Brown Black Blue Brown Black Blue Brown Black

TE3

E

N1 Y01 P24V IN0 N24V P24V IN1 N24V P24V IN N24V P24V OUT E

ASLINKER1 input 2

ASLINKER2 input 1, output 1

BlackRed

WhiteBrown

N

Y01

24 V0 VDPDN

24 V0 VDPDN

BlackRed

WhiteGreen

BlackRed

WhiteGreen

ATION PANEL

3. DESIGNING CO3.3 Bu

3

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

NE

L

3.3 Building a Control Panel and Operation Panel

Build and place a control panel in which a programmable controller system is to be installed and an operation panel in which a GOT is to be installed based on the following specifications.

3.3.1 Building a control panel (chassis)

To build a control panel described in "3.1 Layout Example", use the following information as a guide.

(1) Size

(2) Installing a DIN rail

(Unit: mm)

Install a DIN rail in the control panel based on th

ollowing information. R e f

T

D

ES

IGN

ING

CO

N

(a) Installation position of the programmable controllerTo ensure good ventilation and ease module change, provide clearance between the module top/bottom and structures/parts as shown below.

*1 When using connectors for external devices, provide clearance of 80 mm or more.

Door

Programmablecontroller

*1

50 mmor more

50 mmor more

30 mm or more

30 mm or more

Controlpanel

20 mmor more

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANELilding a Control Panel and Operation Panel

3 - 5

3 - 6 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.3 Building a Control Panel and Operation Pa

(b) Layout of programmable controller system components inside the control panel

(c) Interval between DIN rail mounting screwsTo ensure the strength of a DIN rail, tighten DIN rail mounting screws (Products to be prepared by users) within 30 mm away from the both edges of the DIN rail and at 200 mm-interval between the screws.

(d) Applicable DIN rail model (IEC 60715)

(Unit: mm)

DIN rail

35 mm

30 mm or less

P = 200 mm or less

PPP30 mm or less

DIN rail mounting screws (Products to be prepared by users)

• TH35-7.5Fe

• TH35-7.5Al• TH35-15Fe

(e) DIN rail stopper

Use a stopper that is attachable to the DIN

l. rai

ATION PANELnel

3. DESIGNING CO3.3 Bu

(f) Sizes of mounting and installation holes for a power supply lamp, main power supply, and cable clamp

Make holes on the doors and right side and

ft side of the control panel chassis as shown below. le

Control panel cutout dimensions

3

DE

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

NE

L

(Unit: mm)

70 × 50 square hole

4-φ4.5 hole

(Hole)

φ22.3 hole

4-φ10 hole

2-φ6 hole

(Hole)

40 × 38 square hole

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANELilding a Control Panel and Operation Panel

3 - 7

3 - 8 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.3 Building a Control Panel and Operation Pa

3.3.2 Building an operation panel (chassis)

To build an operation panel described in "3.1 Layout Example", use the following information as a guide.

(1) Size

(a) When using the GT2715-XTBA

(b) When using the GT2512-STBA

(Unit: mm)

(Unit: mm)

ATION PANELnel

3. DESIGNING CO3.3 Bu

(2) Installing a DIN rail

Install a DIN rail in the operation panel based on

e following information.

3

DE

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

NE

L

th

For the details of the interval between DIN rail mounting screws and applicable DIN rail model and DIN rail stopper, refer to the following.

3.3.1 Building a control panel (chassis)

(3) Installation position of the GOTTo install the GOT, some distance is required between the GOT and the other devices.Depending on the units and cables used for the GOT, the distance more than the described dimensions may be required.Install the GOT with consideration of the connector dimensions and the cable bend radius.For the cable pull-out distance from the bottom of the GOT, refer to the following.

Appendix.2.2 Specifications of the GT2715-XTBA

Appendix.2.3 Specifications of the GT2512-STBA

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANELilding a Control Panel and Operation Panel

3 - 9

3 - 10 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.3 Building a Control Panel and Operation Pa

(a) Sizes of mounting and installation holes for the GOT, startup switch, and cable clamp

Make holes on the doors and right side and

ttom of the operation panel chassis as shown below. bo

• Operation panel cutout dimensions (whe

sing the GT2715-XTBA) n u

• Operation panel cutout dimensions (when using the GT2512-STBA)

(Unit: mm)

4-φ4.5 hole

70 × 50 square hole

4-φ6 hole

φ22.3 hole

(Hole)

(Hole)

383.5 × 282.5 square hole

(Unit: mm)

4-φ4.5 hole

70 × 50 square hole

4-φ6 hole

φ22.3 hole

(Hole)

(Hole)

332 × 228 square hole

ATION PANELnel

3. DESIGNING CO3.4 In

3

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

NE

L

3.4 Installing a Programmable Controller System

3.4.1 Entire system configuration

The following figure shows the entire system configuration of the programmable controller system to be installed in the control panel.Installing a programmable controller in the control panel with full consideration of operability, maintainability, and environment resistance.

1) 2) 3) 4)

7)

5)

9) 9) 9) 9)8)

6)7) 7)

DE

SIG

No. Name Remarks

1) Power supply module MELSEC-L series power supply module (AC input)

2) CPU module MELSEC-L series programmable controller

3) AnyWireASLINK master module Master module for MELSEC-L series AnyWireASLINK system

4) Output module MELSEC-L series output module

5) 24 V DC power supply

6) DC I/O conversion module General-purpose screw terminal for wiring external I/O devices

7) Terminal block For 24 V DC power supply

8) ASLINK filter (ANF-01) For 24 V DC power supply

9)

Circuit protector (CP1)

Circuit protector (CP2)

Circuit protector (CP3)

Circuit protector (CP4)

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANELstalling a Programmable Controller System

3 - 11

3 - 12 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.4 Installing a Programmable Controller Syste

3.4.2 I/O interface of a programmable controller

5) 1) 4)2) 3)

3.4.3 Precautions on system configuration

(1) Rated output current (5 V DC)

No. Name Standard Use

1) Ethernet connector 10Base-T/100Base-TX• For connection with the GOT

• For connecting a personal computer

2) Connector for external devices 40-pin (Male)For connection with the DC I/O conversion module

(indicator lights, buzzers, and external input switches)

3)AnyWireASLINK transmission

line terminalAnyWireASLINK

For connecting POKAYOKE terminals, ASLINKER, and ASLINK-compatible

electric screwdrivers

4) Output terminal block 18-point screw terminal block For power control of electric screwdrivers

5) USB interface (Device)USB2.0

Connector shape: Mini-BFor connecting a personal computer

Configure a system so that the total current cons

ption may not exceed 5 V DC, the rated output current of the um

power supply module. ( Appendix.1 Specifications of the Programmable Controller)

(2) For the power capacity

A shortage of the power capacity may result dep

ding on the combination of connected modules and the ennumbers of connected modules. When connecting the modules, be sure to consider the power capacity. If there is a shortage of the power capacity, consider the combination of modules to be connected.

(3) Installation environment

Install the programmable controller according to

e installation environment shown in the general th

specifications. ( Appendix.1 Specifications of the Programmable Controller)Do not install the programmable controller to the place where:

• An ambient temperature is outside the range

to 55°C; of 0• Ambient humidity is outside the range of 5 to 95%RH;• Condensation occurs due to rapid temperature change;• Corrosive gas or combustible gas is present;• Conductive powder such as dust and iron powder, oil mist, salinity, or organic solvent is filled;• The programmable controller is exposed to direct sunlight;• A strong electric field or strong magnetic field is generated; and• The programmable controller is subject to vibration and shock.

ATION PANELm

3. DESIGNING CO3.4 In

3.4.4 Checking serial number and function version

The serial number and function version of the module can be checked any of on:

• the rating plate, or

• Serial No. display board

(1) Checking on the rating plate

The rating plate is located on the side of the mod

e.

3

D O

PE

RA

TIO

N P

AN

EL

ul

(2) Checking on the serial No. display board

111110000000000 -AFunction versionSerial number

Relevant regulationstandards

N

The serial No. display board is located on the fro face (bottom) of the module.

DE

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

nt

L06CPU-AP010

111110000000000- A

Serial number Function version

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANELstalling a Programmable Controller System

3 - 13

3 - 14 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.4 Installing a Programmable Controller Syste

3.4.5 Connecting the modules

The following describes the procedure for connecting modules.

POINTPOINTPOINT

To prevent consumption of the CPU module battery, the battery connector is disconnected at shipment. Connect the battery connector before using the CPU module for the first time.

Appendix.1.3 Battery replacement procedure

CAUTIONShut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before connecting or disconnecting modules.

(1) Connecting modules

1. To release the module joint levers located at the

(2) Disconnecting modules

top and bottom of the module:Slide the levers toward the front side of the module until they click.

2. Insert the connector of the power supply module into that of the CPU module so that they are securely engaged.

3. To lock the module joint levers:Slide the levers toward the back side of the module until they click.Make sure that the modules are securely connected.

Release

Lock

Disconnect the modules in the reverse manner o

1). f (

POINTPOINTPOINT

• Failure to securely lock the module joint levers until they click may cause malfunction, failure, or drop of the module.

• The metal parts of a module (such as the back side) may be heated to a high temperature immediately after the power is turned off. Therefore, be careful not to burn yourself when disconnecting a module.

ATION PANELm

3. DESIGNING CO3.4 In

(3) Illustration of module connection

The following figure shows the connection order

modules.

3

DE

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

NE

L

of

3.4.6 Mounting on a DIN rail

The following shows the procedure for mounting modules on a DIN rail.

The following shows the procedure using the programmable controller system. A 24 V DC power supply, terminal blocks, and circuit protectors can be mounted by the same procedure.

The following figure shows DIN rails in the control panel and operation panel in yellow.

POINTPOINTPOINT

The procedure for using a DIN rail stopper is an example. When fixing the modules, refer to the manual for the DIN rail stopper used.

Power supply module CPU module Output module

END cover

AnyWireASLINK master module

Control panel Operation panel

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANELstalling a Programmable Controller System

3 - 15

3 - 16 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.4 Installing a Programmable Controller Syste

(1) Mounting procedure

1. Pull down DIN rail hooks on the back of the modules until they click.

2. Hang the upper tabs of the modules on a DIN rail, and push the modules in position.

3. Lock the DIN rail hooks to the DIN rail to secure the modules in position.Pull the hooks up until they click.If the hooks are beyond the reach, use a tool such as a driver.

4. Loosen the screw on DIN rail stopper.

5. Hitch the bottom hook of the DIN rail stopper to the bottom of the DIN rail.Hitch the hook according to the orientation of the arrow on the front of the stopper.

6. Hitch the upper hook of the DIN rail stopper to the top of the DIN rail.

Hitch the hook tobottom of the DIN rail.

Hitch the hook totop of the DIN rail.

ATION PANELm

3

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

NE

L

POINTPOINTPOINT

Do not slide modules from the edge of the DIN rail when mounting them. Doing so may damage the metal part located on the back of the module.

(2) Removal procedure

7. Slide the DIN rail stopper up to the left side of the modules.

8. Hold down the DIN rail stopper in the opposite direction of the arrow marked on the stopper, and tighten the screw on the stopper with a driver.

9. Attach a DIN rail stopper on the right of the modules with the same procedure. Use the stopper carefully when attaching on the right side of an END cover, because the stopper should be attached top side down.

DIN railstopper

DIN rail

DIN railstopper

DIN rail

DIN railstopper

DIN rail

(Right side)

E

Remove the modules from the DIN rail in the rev

3. DESIGNING CO3.4 In

se manner of (1).

D

er

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANELstalling a Programmable Controller System

3 - 17

3 - 18 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.5 Installing a GOT

3.5 Installing a GOT

This section describes how to install the GOT on the door panel of the operation panel.

Install the GOT in consideration of the control panel inside dimensions and installation prohibited area.Depending on the types of connection cables connected to the GOT, a distance longer than the specified one may be required.Install the GOT in consideration of the connector size and cable bend radius.

The right figure shows the GOT on the door panel of the operation panel in yellow.

3.5.1 I/O interface of a GOT

1)

3)

4)

2)

No. Name Standard Use

1) USB interface (host, front face)USB2.0

Connector shape: TYPE-AFor backing up/restoring the work table settings

2) SD memory card interface1 channel SDHC supported

(Max. 32 GB)

For reading image data and comment data created with the SCR

Information editing Tool

(Do not remove the SD memory card without permission.)

3) Ethernet connector 10Base-T/100Base-TX

• For connecting the programmable controller and the personal

computer for database server

• For connecting a personal computer

4) USB interface (device, front face)USB2.0

Connector shape: Mini-BFor connecting a personal computer

ATION PANEL

3. DESIGNING CO

3

EL

3.5.2 Installing the GOT

The following shows the procedure for installing the GOT.

POINTPOINTPOINT

A battery has been installed in the battery cover as standard. Before using the GOT, connect the connectors of the GOT and the battery.

Appendix.2.4 Battery replacement procedure

1. Insert the GOT rear face into the panel opening.

N

L

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

2. While positioning a fitting on the mounting hole of the GOT, tighten a screw within the specified torque range (0.36 N·m to 0.48 N·m).Tightening the screw with a torque exceeding the specified torque range may deform the GOT front panel, causing the protective sheet to become crinkled.

Panel opening

GOT

DE

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

O

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANEL3.5 Installing a GOT

3 - 19

3 - 20 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.5 Installing a GOT

3.5.3 Confirming of versions and conforming standards

The GOT hardware version, BootOS version, function version, and conforming standards can be confirmed at the rating plate on the GOT rear face.

QR code

Conforming standard

MAC addressGOT serial number

Function versionBootOS versionHardware versionManufacturing date

Manufacturing year(lower two digits of the year of grace)

Manufacturing month(1 to 9: manufacturing month, X: October, Y: November, Z: December)

MODEL

DATE

MADE IN JAPAN

SERIALMAC ADD. 123456789012POWER

GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINALPASSED

IN

2013-0900013910AA00000-A

MAX 100VA100-240VAC 50/60Hz

0 0 0 1 3 9 1 0 A A 0 0 0 0 0 - A

ATION PANEL

3. DESIGNING CO3.6 Wir

3.6 Wiring the Control Panel and Operation Panel

When the installation in the control panel and operation panel has been completed, perform wiring based on the circuit design diagram introduced in "3.2 Circuit Design Example".

3

3.6.1 Wiring

(1) Wiring

The following figure shows an example of wiring

r this system in which the GOT is housed in the operation

DE

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ION

PA

NE

L

fopanel and the CPU module is housed together with the 24 V DC power supply for POKAYOKE terminals in the control panel.

0000-0

000-0

0abcdef

0000-0

000-0

0

OF

F

RU

N

ON

ST

AR

T

ooooo

oo

0000-0

000-0

0abcdef

0000-0

000-0

0

OF

F

RU

N

ON

ST

AR

T

ooooo

oo

100 to 240 V AC

Operation panel

Control panel

Three-color stack light

Two-color stack light

Input switch Buzzer

RS-232 GOT

Programmable controller system

Barcode reader

ASLINK filter

24 V DC power supply

POKAYOKE terminal

AnyWireASLINK

Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

Power supply box

ASLINK-compatible

electric screwdriver

Non ASLINK-

compatible electric

screwdriver

Terminal block

CON

ASLINKER

LED lamp

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANELing the Control Panel and Operation Panel

3 - 21

3 - 22 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPER3.6 Wiring the Control Panel and Operation Pa

(2) Precautions for wiring

The following describes the precautions for wirin

o power supply modules. g t

• Wire the power supply of the programmable c

troller or GOT, I/O power supply, and dynamic power supply onas shown below to separate the systems.

• Considering the rated current and inrush current of the power supply module, connect a breaker having appropriate sensing property or an external fuse causing proper blowout. (When using a single programmable controller, connecting a breaker around 10 A or an external fuse is recommended.)

• To minimize a voltage drop, use thick power cables up to 2 mm2, twist the cables closely, and connect the modules with the shortest distance.

• Do not install the power cables together with the main circuit (high voltage and high current) cables, I/O signal cables, and common cables. Keep a distance of 100 mm or more between them.

• If there is much noise due to a lightning surge or other causes, connect an isolation transformer.(For measures against noise of the products manufactured by other companies, refer to the product manuals supplied with the devices.)

• After wiring, always attach the included terminal cover to the power supply module and do not touch any terminal while the power is on or the module is operating.

• Use a Class 2 power supply for a module using a DC power supply.• Configure a system so that the total current consumption may not exceed 5 V DC, the rated output current of

the power supply module. For the specifications of the power supply module, refer to the following.

Appendix.1.4 Specifications of the power supply module

• Due to noise caused by lightning surge, a momentary power failure may be detected or the CPU module may be reset. As measures against the noise, connect a surge absorber for lightning as shown below.

Separate the ground for the lightning surge absorber (E1) and ground for the programmable controller or GOT (E2).Select an appropriate lightning surge absorber that does not exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage of the surge absorber even when the power supply voltage has increased to the maximum.

Programmablecontroller

orGOT

Isolationtransformer

I/O powersupply

Motor power supply

I/O equipment

Motor equipment

Mainpowersupply

Relayterminal

block

Inside a control panel

Programmablecontroller/GOT power supply

100 V AC200 V AC

T1

Surge absorber for lightning

Programmablecontroller

orGOT

AC

E2

E1

ATION PANELnel

• Always use a solderless terminal for wiring to t

3. DESIGNING CO3.6 Wir

terminal block on a power supply module. To prevent a short

3

EL

hewhen screws come loose, always use a solderless terminal with insulation sleeve of 0.8 mm or less in thickness. Up to two solderless terminals can be connected to one terminal block.

TerminalscrewTerminal

screwSolderless terminal

Solderless terminal

When wiring one cableto one terminal

When wiring two cablesto one terminal

6.2 mm or less

6.2 mm or less

φ3.2

φ3.2

TIO

N P

AN

• Use UL-approved solderless terminals and, for processing, use a tool recommended by their manufacturer.• Tighten the terminal screws of the power supply module within the range of 0.66 to 0.89 N·m).• Use the following wire to the power supply module.

Applicable solderless terminal

RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

PE

RA

Applicable wire size Material Temperature rating

0.75 to 2 mm2 (18 to 14 AWG) (stranded) Copper 75°C or more

• Inputting a signal with a different voltage may

use malfunction of the module and failure of the external

DE

SIG

NIN

G C

ON

TR

OL

PA

NE

L A

ND

O

cadevices.

• Use an online UPS (uninterruptible power supply) with a power distortion factor of 5% or less or a line interactive UPS. If a standby UPS is used, use a Mitsubishi low-capacity UPS "FREQUPS FW-F series" (hereinafter FW-F series). (Example: FWF10-0.3K/0.5K)

• Select a power supply having enough power for a power supply module. (For an AC power supply module, the power capacity should be twice or more as great as the current consumption of the power supply module, and four times or more for a DC power supply module.)

(3) GroundingObserve the following:• Provide independent grounding when possible. Ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground

conductor dedicated to the programmable controller (ground resistance: 100 Ω or less).• If independent grounding cannot be provided, employ (2) Shared grounding shown below.

• Use thick cables up to 2 mm2. Reduce the distance between the ground point and the programmable controller/GOT as long as possible to shorten the ground cable.

Programmablecontrolleror GOT

Equipment

(2) Shared grounding ... Allowed

Programmablecontrolleror GOT

Equipment

Grounding

(3) Common grounding ... Not allowed

Programmablecontrolleror GOT

Equipment

Grounding

(1) Independent grounding ... Recommended

NTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANELing the Control Panel and Operation Panel

3 - 23

3 - 24 3. DESIGNING CONTROL PANEL AND OPERATION PANEL3.6 Wiring the Control Panel and Operation Panel

4.1 Instal

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES

This chapter describes how to install the control panel, operation panel, barcode readers, electric screwdrivers, and POKAYOKE terminals to work tables.

4.1 Installing the Control Panel and Operation Panel

The bottoms of the control panel and operation panel have installation holes.

3.3.1 Building a control panel (chassis)

3.3.2 Building an operation panel (chassis)

(1) Control panel

(2) Operation panel

(a) When using the GT2715-XTBA

(b) When using the GT2512-STBA

To prevent accidents caused by dropping and toppling over of the control panel and operation panel, secure them on a workbench or floor with bolt nuts and in a horizontal position.

Installation hole: 4-φ10 hole

Installation hole: 4-φ6 hole

Installation hole: 4-φ6 hole

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLESling the Control Panel and Operation Panel

4 - 1

4 - 2 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.2 Installing Barcode Readers

4.2 Installing Barcode Readers

Use the following barcode readers for this application.

• DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED: AT26Q-SM(R), AT

-SM(R), AT21Q-SM(R), AT20Q-SM(R) 25Q• Cognex Corporation: DMR-8050-0100

POINTPOINTPOINT

For the latest information on the products, refer to the website of each manufacturer.

• DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED: www.denso-

ve.com wa• Cognex Corporation: www.cognex.com

Connect a barcode reader to the GOT with the RS-232 interface cable supplied with the barcode reader.

Set the barcode reader according to the GOT settings.The following table lists the barcode reader settings at the GOT side.

CAUTION

• Handle only the connector when unplugging the DC power supply from the jack. Pulling on the cable risks damaging the internal conductors.

• Avoid unnecessary connection and disconnection. Excessive wear can lead to faulty connections.

• Use only the AC adapter provided.

Item Settings

Baud rate 9600 bps

Data length 8

Stop bit 1

Parity Even

Header None

Terminator CR

Input completion notification Disable

RS-232

GOTBarcode reader

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

4.2.1 Barcode reader manufactured by DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED

According to the following procedure, configure the settings using the 2D code symbols on the User's Manual supplied with the barcode reader.

1. Scan the "Start setting" 2D code symbol in "Menu control (Starting/Ending the Setting Procedure and Reverting to Defaults)".

2. Scan the "All defaults" 2D code symbol in "Menu control (Starting/Ending the Setting Procedure and Reverting to Defaults)".

3. Scan the "Start setting" 2D code symbol in "Menu control (Starting/Ending the Setting Procedure and Reverting to Defaults)".

4. Scan the "9600 bps" 2D code symbol in "Transmission speed".

5. Scan the "Even parity" 2D code symbol in "Parity".

6. Scan the "End setting" 2D code symbol in "Menu control (Starting/Ending the Setting Procedure and Reverting to Defaults)".

Start setting

All defaults

Start setting

9600 bps

Even parity

End setting

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.2 Installing Barcode Readers

4 - 3

4 - 4 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.2 Installing Barcode Readers

4.2.2 Barcode reader manufactured by Cognex Corporation

According to the following procedure, configure the settings using the 2D code symbols on the User's Manual supplied with the barcode reader.

1. Scan the "Reset Scanner to Factory Defaults" 2D code symbol in "Product Settings".

2. Scan the "Enable QR Code" 2D code symbol in "Symbology Settings".

3. Scan the "9600 BPS" 2D code symbol in "RS-232 Baud Rate".

4. Scan the "Even" 2D code symbol in "RS-232 Parity Settings".

5. Scan the "Databit 8" 2D code symbol in "RS-232 Databit Settings".

6. Scan the "Stopbit 1" 2D code symbol in "RS-232 Stopbit Settings".

7. Power off and on the barcode reader to enable the setting.

4.3 Installing Electric Screwdrivers

Use the following electric screwdrivers for this application. (The following electric screwdrivers can be used together.)

• NITTO KOHKI CO., LTD.: Electric screwdriver interloc

g with other FA devices (ASLINK-compatible) kin• NITTO KOHKI CO., LTD.: Electric screwdrivers with screw tightening counter (Non ASLINK-compatible)• Others: Externally connected electric screwdriver

POINTPOINTPOINT

For the latest information on the products, refer to the website of each manufacturer.

• NITTO KOHKI CO., LTD.: www.nitto-kohki.co.jp

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

/e(For electric screwdrivers interlocking with other FA devices, contact NITTO KOHKI CO., LTD. from the above website.)

The following describes how to connect electric screwdrivers.

4.3.1 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver

1. Separate the power wires of electric screwdrivers via a plug and connect one side to the output module of the programmable controller system.

2. Connect the ASLINK cables from the electric screwdrivers with the cable from the AnyWireASLINK master module of the programmable controller system and LP connectors.

100 V or 240 V AC

Programmable controller system

ASLINK filter

24 V DC power supply

AnyWireASLINK

ASLINK-compatible

electric screwdriver

Insulation displacement connector

AnyWireASLINK

•••••

•••••

Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

Power supply box

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.3 Installing Electric Screwdrivers

4 - 5

4 - 6 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.3 Installing Electric Screwdrivers

4.3.2 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver

1. Connect the cable from the AnyWireASLINK master module of the programmable controller system and the cable from ASLINKER with LP connectors.

2. Separate the connectors on the edges of the cables from the electric screwdrivers into power wires and signal wires.

3. Connect one side of the separated power wires to the output module of the programmable controller system.

4. Connect the separated signal wires to the ASLINKER input/output wires.

4.3.3 Externally connected electric screwdriver

1. Externally connected electric screwdrivers do not control the ON/OFF status of the power supply from the programmable controller system.Connect the electric screwdrivers to the power supply (100 V AC or 200 V AC) without through a programmable controller system.

2. The programmable controller system controls OK/NG signals from electric screwdrivers.Add the I/O modules to the programmable controller system and customize user programs as needed.

POINTPOINTPOINT

For user customization of externally connected electric screwdrivers, refer to the following.

7.4 Externally Connected Electric Screwdriver

100 V or 240 V AC

Programmable controller system

ASLINK filter

24 V DC power supply

AnyWireASLINK

Non ASLINK-compatible

electric screwdriver

Insulation displacement connector

AnyWireASLINK

CONCON

•••••

•••••

LED lamp LED lamp0000-0000-00abcdef

0000-0000-00

OFF

RUN

ON

START

ooooo

oo

0000-0000-00abcdef

0000-0000-00

OFF

RUN

ON

START

ooooo

oo

ASLINKER

Two point inputs

One point input, one point output

Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

Power supply box

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

The following figure shows the system configuration of POKAYOKE terminals in this application.

The methods for connecting POKAYOKE terminals are described by type on the next page or later.

Programmable controller system

ASLINK filter

AnyWireASLINK

Insulation displacement connector

AnyWireASLINK

24 V DC power supply

POKAYOKE terminal

Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 7

4 - 8 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4.4.1 Push-button type

Install POKAYOKE terminals where the following environmental conditions are satisfied. This type of terminals does not have protective structures.

• The body is isolated from direct vibration and shock.

• Terminals are not directly exposed to dust particles.• Conductors such as metal chippings and spatters do not directly reach terminals.• No condensation• The atmosphere contains neither corrosive gas nor flammable gas nor sulfur.• High-voltage and large-current cables are far away.• Cables and controllers such as servo amplifiers and inverters that generate high frequency noises are far away.

(1) Part namesBL227XB-K02VN-P, BL227XB-K06MN-P

(2) Model

(3) Mounting on pipesPush-button type terminals can be mounted on φ28 pipes.

CAUTION• Do not apply excessive force or impact on the pickup confirmation switch. Otherwise the

switch may be damaged. (0.49 G or smaller)• Do not install terminals at a site with continuous vibrations.

BL227XB-K02VN-PInput 1 point Pickup confirmation input (Push button)

Output 1 point One color selection type light

BL227XB-K06MN-PInput 1 point Pickup confirmation input (Push button)

Output 3 point RGB combination type light

Transmission line connection connector

Pickup indicator lightPush-button switch

Pipe installation holder

Hexagon socket head bolt

Input indicator (IN/ALM)Address setting port (R/W)

Transmission indicator (LINK)

Hexagon socket head bolt (M6 × 15)

Fit a boss of the fitting B in the hinge section of the terminal.

Attach the fitting B to the pipe, and engage the terminal and the fitting B.

Slide the terminal to adjust its position.

After the positioning of the terminal, permanently fix the terminal with the supplied bolt.

Tab of the terminal

Terminal

Hinge section

Fitting B

Groove of the fitting B

Tightening torque of M6 bolt: 1.5 to 2 N•m

One bolt supplied with a terminal

(4) How to connectConnect the link connector at the end of the cable jutting out from the back of the module to a pressure-welded link connector at a position on the main cable.

(5) How to wireInstall a terminal power supply for each shelf.The transmission lines connected to terminals within the range of supply of the terminal power are only DP, and DN. Additionally supply the terminal power 24 V, 0 V.

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

Terminal power supply (L)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (T) (White)4 = N.C (Brown)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Brown)

1 = N.C2 = N.C3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Brown)

• Permissible voltage24 to 27.6 V DC

• Rated voltage24 V DC

• Power supply capacity

M: Number of terminals in the standby statusN: Number of modules whose outputs are to be turned

on simultaneously

[Configuration example]

DN (Black)DP (Red)

BL227XB-K02VN-P

BL227XB-K02VN-P

AnyWireASLINK master module(LJ51AW12AL)

LED

Terminator BT0Red (DP)

Black (DN)

Transmission power supply (T)

Local power supply (24 V DC stabilized power supply)

[(35 mA × M) + (35 mA × N)] × 1.3

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Green)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Brown)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Green)

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 9

4 - 10 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4.4.2 Lever type

Install POKAYOKE terminals where the following environmental conditions are satisfied. This type of terminals does not have protective structures.

• The body is isolated from direct vibration and shock.

• Terminals are not directly exposed to dust particles. (This condition should be satisfied because terminals do not have

protective structures.)• Conductors such as metal chippings and spatters do not directly reach terminals.• No condensation• The atmosphere contains neither corrosive gas nor flammable gas nor sulfur.• High-voltage and large-current cables are far away.• Cables and controllers such as servo amplifiers and inverters that generate high frequency noises are far away.

(1) Part namesBL227XB-K02V-P, BL227XB-K06M-P

(2) Model

(3) Mounting on pipesLever type terminals can be mounted on φ28 pipes.

CAUTION• Do not apply excessive force or impact on the pickup confirmation switch. Otherwise the

switch may be damaged. (0.49 G or smaller)• Do not install terminals at a site with continuous vibrations.

BL227XB-K02V-POne-bit input Pickup confirmation input (lever)

One-bit output One color selection type light

BL227XB-K06M-POne-bit input Pickup confirmation input (lever)

Three-bit output RGB combination type light

Transmission line connection connector

Pickup indicator light

Lever switch

Pipe installation holder

Hexagon socket head bolt

Transmission indicator (LINK)

Address setting port (R/W)Input indicator (IN/ALM)

Hexagon socket head bolt (M6 × 15)One bolt supplied with a terminal

Fit a boss of the fitting B in the hinge section of the terminal.

Attach the fitting B to the pipe, and engage the terminal and the fitting B.

Slide the terminal to adjust its position.

After the positioning of the terminal, permanently fix the terminal with the supplied bolt.

Tab of the terminal

Terminal

Hinge section

Fitting B

Groove of the fitting B

Tightening torque of M6 bolt: 1.5 to 2 N•m

(4) How to connectConnect the link connector at the end of the cable jutting out from the back of the module to a pressure-welded link connector at a position on the main cable.

(5) How to wireInstall a terminal power supply for each shelf.The transmission lines connected to terminals within the range of supply of the terminal power are only DP, and DN. Additionally supply the terminal power 24 V, 0 V.

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

Transmission power supply (T)

Local power supply for shelves (L)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (T) (White)4 = N.C (Brown)

1 = N.C2 = N.C3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Brown)

Local power supply (24 V DC stabilized power supply)

• Permissible voltage24 to 27.6 V DC

• Rated voltage24 V DC

• Power supply capacity

M: Number of terminals in the standby statusN: Number of modules whose outputs are to be turned

on simultaneously

[Configuration example]

DN (Black)DP (Red)

BL227XB-K02V-P

AnyWireASLINK master module(LJ51AW12AL)

LED

Terminator BT0Red (DP)

Black (DN)

BL227XB-K02V-P

[(35 mA × M) + (35 mA × N)] × 1.3

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Brown)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Green)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Brown)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Green)

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 11

4 - 12 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4.4.3 Transparent type

Install POKAYOKE terminals where the following environmental conditions are satisfied. This type of terminals does not have protective structures.

• The body is isolated from direct vibration and shock.

• Conductors such as metal chippings and spatters do not directly reach terminals.• No condensation• The atmosphere contains neither corrosive gas nor flammable gas nor sulfur.• High-voltage and large-current cables are far away.• Cables and controllers such as servo amplifiers and inverters that generate high frequency noises are far away.

(1) Part names

(2) Model

BL227PB-T14P02V-P (light emission) One-bit output One color selection type light

BL227XB-T14P02V-C (light reception)One-bit input Pickup confirmation input

One-bit output One color selection type light

BL227PB-T07P02V-P (light emission) One-bit output One color selection type light

BL227XB-T07P02V-C (light reception)One-bit input Pickup confirmation input

One-bit output One color selection type light

Spare

Setting port

Lightemittingsection(5 axes)

Pickup indicator light(Selected color)

Transmission indicator LINK (Green)

Installation hole(2 holes)

Transmission indicator LINK (Green)

Setting port

Pickup indicator light(Selected color)

Installation hole(2 holes)

Input indicator I/O (Orange)

Lightreceivingsection(5 axes)

BL227PB-T14P02V-P (Light emitting side)A green sticker is on the side surface of the sensor.

BL227XB-T14P02V-C (Light receiving side)A pink sticker is on the side surface of the sensor.

Transmission line connection connector (DP, DN, 24 V, 0 V)

Transmission line connection connector (DP, DN, 24 V, 0 V)

ALM (Red) ALM (Red)

4

AL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

(3) Mounting on pipesTransparent type terminals can be mounted on φ28 pipes using the optional pipe installation holder (A027-T14PHP28-H1) and screw set (A027-TPSM4-5P).The module protective fittings (A027-T14PC) can also be used.

(a) Mounting on the pipe installation holder

The above figures show the BL227PB-T14P02V-P. The BL227XB-T14P02V-C and BL227PB-T14P02V-P are bilaterally symmetrical.

Without protective fittings With protective fittings

2-M4 × 20(Screw set)

BL227PB-T14P02V-P

2-M4(Screw set)

A027-T14PHP28-H1(Pipe installation holder)

BL227PB-T14P02V-P

A027-T14PC

A027-T14PHP28-H1

2-M4 × 20(Screw set)

2-M4(Screw set)

T

IN

S

(b) Mounting on a pipe

The above figure shows the terminal with protective fittings installed.

Hexagon socket head bolt (attachment)M6 × 15Tightening torque: 1.5 to 2 N•m

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 13

4 - 14 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

(4) Detection and adjusting optical axesThis module turns on (input indication: ON) when "the light is blocked".Oppose the light emitting/receiving terminals to adjust the optical axes to the position where the input indication is lost.Because a misadjustment of the position of the optical axis causes the same status as the status that blocking light causes, the input indicator turns on.After an adjustment, block the light with your hand to check if the indicator turns on (input indication: ON).

3M4321

3M4 3 2 1

3M4321

3M4321

Set each terminal to face each other to align optical axes as shown above.

The opposite alignment shown above is not acceptable.

(5) How to connectConnect the link connector at the end of the cable jutting out from the back of the module to a pressure-welded link connector at a position on the main cable.

(6) How to wireInstall a terminal power supply for each shelf.The transmission lines connected to terminals within the range of supply of the terminal power are only DP, and DN. Additionally supply the terminal power 24 V, 0 V.

BL22

B-T14P02V-P BL227XB-T14P02V-C

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

CAUTION

Laying transmission lineKeep high voltage lines and power lines away from the transmission line.Use one transmission cable for one AnyWire system. Do not connect cables for two or more systems.Either case may cause malfunctions.

DN

0V

DP

24V

Black (DN) Red (DP)

The farthest end of the transmission line

3 M

3 M

When using a dedicated flat cable FK4-125-100

7P

Terminator BT0

AnyWireASLINK transmission line

DN (Black)

DP (Red)

0 V (White)24 V (Brown)

[Wiring example]

This drawing shows an example of wiring that enables efficient supply of power.

Transparent distance: Max. 1 m

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Green)

Junction of the link connector and the dedicated flat cable

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Green)

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 15

4 - 16 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4.4.4 Door type

Install POKAYOKE terminals where the following environmental conditions are satisfied. This type of terminals does not have protective structures.

• The body is isolated from direct vibration and shock.

• Conductors such as metal chippings and spatters do not directly reach terminals.• No condensation• The atmosphere contains neither corrosive gas nor flammable gas nor sulfur.• High-voltage and large-current cables are far away.• Cables and controllers such as servo amplifiers and inverters that generate high frequency noises are far away.

CAUTION

• Do not install terminals vertically.• Do not apply excessive force or impact on the pickup confirmation switch. Otherwise the

switch may be damaged. (0.49 G or smaller)• Do not install terminals at a site with continuous vibrations.

(1) Part namesBL227XB-F04V-P

DP: RedDN: Black

24 V: Green0 V: White

Arm

Pickup indicator light

Address setting port (R/W)

Transmission line connection connector

Hexagon socket head bolt

Pipe installation holderTransmission indicator (LINK)

Input indicator (IN/ALM)

Lever switch

(2) ModelBit operation

BL227XB-F04V-PInput 2 point Switch input/break open detection

Output 2 point One color selection type light/Door opening/closing

(3) Mounting on pipesDoor-type terminals can be mounted on φ28 pipes.

Hexagon socket head bolt (M6 × 15)One bolt supplied with a terminal

Tab of the terminalTerminal

Hinge section

Fitting B

1) Fit a boss of the fitting B in the hinge section of the terminal.

2) Attach the fitting B to the pipe, and engage the terminal and the fitting B.Inserting the tab of the terminal into the groove of the fitting B temporarily fixes them.

3) Slide the terminal to adjust its position.

4) After the positioning of the terminal, permanently fix the terminal with the supplied bolt.

Tightening torque of M6 bolt: 1.5 to 2 N•m

Groove of the fitting B

(4) How to connectConnect the link connector at the end of the cable jutting out from the back of the module to a pressure-welded link connector at a position on the main cable.

(5) How to wireInstall a terminal power supply for each shelf.The transmission lines connected to terminals within the range of supply of the terminal power are only DP, and DN. Additionally supply the terminal power 24 V, 0 V.

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

Transmission power supply (T)

Terminal power supply (L)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (T) (White)4 = N.C (Brown)

1 = N.C2 = N.C3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Brown)

Local power supply (24 V DC stabilized power supply)

• Permissible voltage24 to 27.6 V DC

• Rated voltage24 V DC

• Power supply capacity

M: Number of terminals in the standby statusN: Number of modules whose outputs are to be turned

on simultaneously

[Configuration example]

DN (Black)DP (Red)

AnyWireASLINK master module(LJ51AW12AL)

LED

Terminator BT0Red (DP)

Black (DN)

ADDRESS No.

BL227XB-F04V-P

ADDRESS No.

BL227XB-F04V-P

[(19 mA × M) + (522 mA × N)] × 1.3

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Brown)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Green)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Brown)

1 = DN (Black)2 = DP (Red)3 = 0 V (L) (White)4 = 24 V (L) (Green)

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 17

4 - 18 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

(6) Pickup confirmation switchThe pickup confirmation switch lever can be tilted in any direction.Tilt the pickup confirmation switch lever at least approximately 30° or more to turn on without fail.

CAUTION

If an impact of 0.49 G or greater is exerted on the pickup confirmation switch, the switch may be damaged.Do not exert a stress such as "twisting" and "a pull in the downward direction".Otherwise the pickup confirmation switch may be damaged.

ADDRESS No.

(7) How to attach a doorWhen a plate is attached to an arm, it becomes the door that covers the screw shelf.As the plate, a light and strong material such as a plastic board is suitable.The following figure and table show an example of materials and the size operated with this terminal.

E

4014

F

(138)4-φ5 t

Straight type

600210

3400250300300200360

E F t

Permissible size of plastic board (unit: mm)

Recommended material for doors

Straight type : Plastic board of 3 mm thickDensity : 500 g/mm2 or less

Standard tightening torque of M4 truss head screws: 1.27 N•m

4

S

4014

(138)

G

H

I

J

Recommended material for doors

Folding-type: Foam plastic board of 3 mm thickDensity: 500 g/mm2 or less

Permissible size of plastic board (unit: mm)

4-φ5

600

3

120 120

200210 210

260

440

G H I J t

Folding-type

400150 150 320300170 170 360

[Reference]

For a center-folding doorWhen using plastic boards for a center-folding door, set a value that causes the plastic board to stop before it becomes vertical.Not doing so may cause the lower door board to stick to the upper door board due to static electricity when the door is closed.

For hinges of a folding-type door, light resin or other materials are supposed to be used.

E

IN

STA

LL

AT

ION

TO

WO

RK

TA

BL

CAUTION

When using plastic boards for a center-folding door, set a value that causes the plastic board to stop before it becomes vertical.Not doing so may cause the lower door board to stick to the upper door board due to static electricity when the door is closed.

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 19

4 - 20 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4.4.5 Small door type (Horizontal metal arm)

Install POKAYOKE terminals where the following environmental conditions are satisfied. This type of terminals does not have protective structures.

• The body is isolated from direct vibration and shock.

• Conductors such as metal chippings and spatters do not directly reach terminals.• No condensation• The atmosphere contains neither corrosive gas nor flammable gas nor sulfur.• High-voltage and large-current cables are far away.• Cables and controllers such as servo amplifiers and inverters that generate high frequency noises are far away.

CAUTION

• Do not install terminals vertically.• Do not apply excessive force or impact on the pickup confirmation switch. Otherwise the

switch may be damaged. (0.49 G or smaller)• Do not install terminals at a site with continuous vibrations.

(1) Part namesBL227XB-R2K08MN-P

(2) Model

Input indicator (IN)

Setting port (R/W)Transmission indicator (LINK) Alarm indicator (ALM)

Hexagon socket head bolt

Installation holder

Arm

Push-button switch

Pickup indicator light

Bit operation

BL227XB-R2K08MN-PInput 2 points Switch input/break open detection

Output 4 points RGB combination type light/Door opening/closing

(3) Mounting on pipes

Door-type terminals can be mounted on φ28 pip

or SUS pipes.

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

es

[SUS] holder

Hinge section

Fitting A

[H] holder

Hinge section

Fitting B

Terminal

[H1] holder

Fit a boss of the fitting A in the hinge section of the terminal.

Attach the fitting A to the pipe, and engage the terminal and the fitting A. Inserting the tab of the terminal into the groove of the fitting A temporarily fixes them.

Slide the terminal to adjust its position.

After the positioning of the terminal, permanently fix the terminal with the supplied bolt.

Fit a boss of the fitting B in the hinge section of the terminal.

Attach the fitting B to the pipe, and engage the terminal and the fitting B. Inserting the tab of the terminal into the groove of the fitting B temporarily fixes them.

Slide the terminal to adjust its position.

After the positioning of the terminal, permanently fix the terminal with the supplied bolt.

Fixed standard tightening torque of hexagon socket head bolt: 1.5 to 2.0 N•m

Mate the protrusion of the green frame with the protrusion on the back of the terminal and fix them by tightening the hexagon socket head bolt.

SUS CorporationGreen Frame GFF-000 Fixed standard tightening

torque of hexagon socket head bolt: 1.5 to 2.0 N•m

Hexagon socket head bolt (M6 × 15) One bolt supplied with a terminal

Groove of the fitting A

Tab of the terminal

Groove of the fitting B

Tab of the terminal

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 21

4 - 22 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

(4) How to connect

Connect the link connector at the end of the cab

jutting out from the back of the module to a pressure-welded le link connector at a position on the main cable.

(5) How to wire

Install a terminal power supply for each shelf.

The transmission lines connected to terminals within the range of supply of the terminal power are only DP and DN. Additionally supply the terminal power 24 V, 0 V.

0 VA

24 VA

AnyWireASLINK master

Transmission power supply

24 V DC

For FK4-125-100

1 = DN (Black) 2 = DP (Red) 3 = 0 VA 4 = 24 VA

1 = DN (Black) 2 = DP (Red) 3 = 0 VA (White) 4 = 24 VA (Brown)

Local power supply for shelves

(6) How to attach a door

Attach a board on the door to expand the dimen

ns of the door. sioAs the board, a light and strong material such as a plastic board is suitable.The following figure and table show an example of materials and the size operated with this terminal.

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

Installation hole

Door

Size of installation holesThread diameter: M4

Fixing screw (attachment) Truss head screw: M4 × 10 Tightening torque: 1.27 N•m

t

Straight type 200100 3

E t

Permissible size of plastic board (unit: mm)

Recommended material for doors

Straight type: Plastic board of 3 mm thick

E

4014

F

2-φ5 (42)

Note: 0.1 × 0.2 × 500 = 10 g

Door processing example

Density: 500 g/m2 or less

F

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 23

4 - 24 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4.4.6 Ultra-compact touch type

Install POKAYOKE terminals where the following environmental conditions are satisfied. This type of terminals does not have protective structures.

• The body is isolated from direct vibration and shock.

• Conductors such as metal chippings and spatters do not directly reach terminals.• No condensation• The atmosphere contains neither corrosive gas nor flammable gas nor sulfur.• High-voltage and large-current cables are far away.• Cables and controllers such as servo amplifiers and inverters that generate high frequency noises are far away.

(1) Part names

(2) ModelBit operation

B292XB-02VLInput 1 point Touch input

Output 1 point One color selection type light

Detection surface

Setting port (R/W)

Approx. 5 mm

ALM displayIN display

LINK display

Model label side

POKAYOKE terminal body

Transmission cable Extension cable

Red (DP)

Black (DN)

Red (DP)

Black (DN)

Connection connector (T)

Connection connector (R)

Connection at connector (R) side

Connection at connector (R) side

Connection at connector (T) side

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

(3) How to installUltracompact touch type terminals can be mounted on wiring ducts.

(4) How to connectConnect the link connector at the end of the cable jutting out from the module to a pressure-welded link connector at a position on the main cable.

Wiring duct (cover)

Wiring duct (cover)

Red

Black

Transmission cable

R side

T side

Model label side

Extension cable

B292XB-02VL

B292XB-02VL

R side

T side

Model label side

Wiring duct (base)

Front

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

4 - 25

4 - 26 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.4 Installing POKAYOKE Terminals

(5) How to wireInstall a terminal power supply for each shelf.The transmission lines connected to terminals within the range of supply of the terminal power are only 0 V, DP, and DN. Additionally supply the terminal power 24 V, 0 V.

(a) For two-wire transmission cables

(b) For four-wire transmission cables

Master module

FK2-125-100

LP2-BR-10PTrunk line link connector

Pin alignment of the link connector

Transmission trunk side POKAYOKE transmission sidePin No. Description Line color

BlackRedDP

DN12

Pin No. Description Line colorBlackRedDP

DN12

LP connectors (link connector) are gender-neutral connectors. Connecting the same type connectors allow users to easily "connect" and "branch" link connector pins.

LP2-PWH-10PCrimp type link connector at the POKAYOKE transmission side

Master module

FK4-125-100

LP4-WR-10P

Pin alignment of the link connector

Transmission trunk side POKAYOKE transmission sidePin No. Description Line color

BlackRed

WhiteBrown

DPDN1

234

Pin No. Description Line colorBlackRedDP

DN

--

--

12

24 V0 V 3

4

LP2-WW-10PCrimp type link connector at the POKAYOKE transmission side

4

AL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK

The following describes the precautions for wiring AnyWireASLINK.

• Tree branch, T-branch, and multidrop connections are usable in the AnyWireASLINK system.However, for stable transmissions, the recommended number of branch levels is 10 or less.

• Up to 128 POKAYOKE terminals can be connected to one AnyWireASLINK master module.However, for this application, the number of connectable POKAYOKE terminals is 30.

• Connect one terminating unit for each system at the far end from the master module.

POINTPOINTPOINT

• The total length of the transmission distance for the AnyWireASLINK system can be calculated from A + B + C.Note that the total length should not exceed the maximum transmission distance or the total length set for the system to branch lines.

• Make T branch connections for the supply side and install wiring so that all supply shelves can be disconnected when one terminal is removed.

(1) Requirements regarding transmission lines and nodes

Master module

Terminatingunit

Slavemodule

Slavemodule

Tree-type

Multidrop

Slavemodule

Slavemodule

T-branch

A

BC

T

Satisfy the following requirements as to the num r of terminals to be connected to one system. There are no

NS

beother requirements such as about the branches of wiring.

I

• Connectable number: maximum of 128 • Length of transmission line: Depends on the number of connected terminals. For the details, refer to the

following.

4.5.1 Precautions for wiring• Total transmission points: maximum of 256 inputs and 256 outputs

(2) Requirements regarding terminators

BT0 is a module that shapes transmission wave

ms. forBecause BT0 has a polarity, do not connect it with reverse polarity. Otherwise transmission trouble occurs.Connect one BT0 in one system at the end of the transmission line farthest from the terminal.If there is a branch line over 40 m, also connect BT0 to the end.Up to two branch lines over 40 m can be connected.

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK

4 - 27

4 - 28 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK

4.5.1 Precautions for wiring

The AnyWireASLINK system transfers signals and supplies power to slave modules by using two types of transmission cables (DP, DN).

(1) Total length of transmission cablesThe total length of transmission cables (including trunk and branch lines) per one AnyWireASLINK master module depends on the maximum power supply current value of the transmission cables.

*1 The power supply current of the transmission cables is the total current consumption of connected POKAYOKE terminals. Refer

to the following list and calculate the total current consumption.

Wire diameter of transmission

cables (DP, DN)

Power supply current of transmission cables

(maximum value)*1Total length of transmission cables

1.25 mm2

2 A 50 m or less

1 A 100 m or less

0.5 A 200 m or less

Product name ModelConsumption current

(DP-DN side)

Electric screwdriver interlocking with other FA devices (2)Electric screwdriver interlocking

with other FA device6 mA

ASLINKER (input 2 points) BL287SB-02F-CC20 3.4 mA

ASLINKER (input 1 point, output 1 point) BL287XB-02F-CC20 3.5 mA

Lever switch type terminal (Selection of one color from seven colors) BL227XB-K02V-P 6 mA

Pushbutton switch type terminal (Selection of one color from seven

colors)BL227XB-K02VN-P 6 mA

Lever switch type terminal (RGB each color independent ON/OFF) BL227XB-K06M-P 6 mA

Pushbutton switch type terminal (RGB each color independent ON/

OFF)BL227XB-K06MN-P 6 mA

LED indication:

Stationery type

Photoelectric transmission type (Dust-proof: 140 mm long, selection of

one color from seven colors)

BL227PB-T14P02V-P (light emission) 2.5 mA

BL227XB-T14P02V-C (light reception) 2.5 mA

LED indication:

Stationery type

Photoelectric transmission type (Dust-proof: 70 mm short, selection of

one color from seven colors)

BL227PB-T07P02V-P (light emission) 2.5 mA

BL227XB-T07P02V-C (light reception) 2.5 mA

Door opening/closing

+ LED indication: Stationary type

Lever switch type

Detection function of forcibly open

selection of one color from seven colors)

BL227XB-F04V-P 6 mA

Small door type terminal, 2-point output type (with break open detection

function, horizontal metal arm, RGB each color independent ON/OFF)BL227XB-R2K08MN-P 6 mA

Ultracompact touch type terminal (Selection of one color from seven

colors)B292XB-02VL 6 mA

(2) Calculation exampleCalculate the total length of transmission cables for when the following POKAYOKE terminals are connected.• Pickup side: 30 pushbutton switch type terminals (Selection of one color from seven colors)• Supply side: 30 door type terminals, 2-point output type (with break open detection function)

BL227XB-K02VN-P (0.006) × 30 + BL227XB-F04V-P (0.006) × 30 = 0.360Thus, the total length of the transmission cables is up to 200 m.

4

TAB

LE

S

POINTPOINTPOINT

• For details of the power supply current and total length of transmission cables, refer to the following manual.

MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

• For details of the current consumption of POKAYOKE terminals, refer to the product manual supplied with the product used.

• Do not send the transmission cables (DP, DN) of multiple systems with multi-core cables in a batch.

• Pay attention to the voltage so that it does not fall below the lower limit of the allowable voltage range due to a voltage drop caused by cables.Otherwise, malfunctions or failures may occur.

• Do not connect soldered lines directly to terminals. Looseness of screws may cause poor contact.

IN

STA

LL

AT

ION

TO

WO

RK

4.5.2 Use of two-wire type terminals and four-wire type terminals

The following figures show connection examples when two-wire type terminals and four-wire type terminals are used together.

(1) Batch power supply

(2) Local batch supply/branch power supply

Two-wire type Four-wire type Four-wire typeAnyWireASLINK master

(Use this as needed.)

When the length of running cables of DP, DN, 24 V, and 0 V exceeds the total length of 50 mGeneral-purpose power supply filter

24 V DC stabilized power supply

AnyWireASLINK master

(Use this as needed.)

Two-wire type Two-wire typeFour-wire type Four-wire type Four-wire type Four-wire type

Four-wire type Four-wire type

When the length of running cables of DP, DN, 24 V, and 0 V exceeds 50 m

When the length (A + B) of running cables of DP, DN, 24 V, and 0 V exceeds the total length 50 m

General-purpose power supply filter

24 V DC stabilized power supply

24 V DC stabilized power supply

General-purpose power supply filter

(Use this as needed.)

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK

4 - 29

4 - 30 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK

4.5.3 Cables

(1) 4-core flat cable

Model Details

FK4-125-10016 AWG (1.25 sq × 4 cores), insulating coating outer diameter: φ2.5±0.1 mm

(Conductor resistance: 0.015 Ω/m, permissible current: 12.7 A), 100 m winding

(2) LP connector (Pressure welding connector)

Model Details

LP4-WR-10PFor 4-core flat cable (1.25 sq)

(Coating outer diameter: φ2.54, cover: white, body: red), pin protector type

LP4-WW-10PFor ASLINKER and ultracompact touch type terminals

(Coating outer diameter: φ1.1 to 1.4, cover: white, body: white)

(3) Pressure welding tool for LP connector

4.5.4 Terminator for AnyWireASLINK

Model Details

LP-TOOLAlthough an LP connector can be pressure welded using a tool such as pliers, a dedicated tool is

recommended for steady working.

CAUTION Insert an ASLINK filter between the 4-core flat cable and 24 V DC power supply.

Model Product specifications Dimension (mm)

BT0Transmission wave shaping module (with polarity) cable

connection (attachment holder included)44×24.5×12

CAUTION

The terminator (BT0) is a module used to stabilize transmission waveforms.Connect the terminator to the end of the transmission line farthest from the master module.Be aware that BT0 has a polarity. (The LED turns on in correct polarity.)A misconnection may cause malfunctions or failures.

4.5.5 Attaching the link connector

The following describes how to attach the link connector with the LP4-WR-10P as an example.To perform pressure welding to the link connector, use the dedicated tool (LP-TOOL: Anywire Corporation).

CAUTION

• Do not make a reverse connection or a short circuit in connection work.A misconnection may cause malfunctions or failures.

• Do not pull cables when making connections.Do not secure cables with stress exerted on them. Doing so may cause poor contact.

4

K T

AB

LE

S

(1) List of component parts

Connector cover Flat cableConnector body

Pin No. displayEnd surface

r

No. displayp y

R

W

O

(2) Pressure welding at the flat cable end

(a) Setting the flat cable on the connector cover

1) Check the pin numbers shown on the g

oves on the inner *1

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O

rosurface of the connector cover and the cable orientation.(The black line is positioned on the hinge side of the connector cover.)Be aware that transmissions are not made with the reverse orientation.

2) Slide the flat cable so that the cable end contacts with the end

face of the connect cover.*1

3) Fold the cover into two in such a way that the cover sandwiches the wires.

4) Secure the tip of the small hooks into the fixing hole.

Small hooks

Check that the small hooks have been fixed in the holes.

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK

4 - 31

4 - 32 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK

(b) Engaging the connector body to the connector coverPush the four electrodes standing on the connector body into the four holes on the connector cover.

Connector body

Hole on the connector bodyLarge hooks

Connector body

Electrodes

Connector cover

Holes for electrodes

(c) Pressure weldingPlace a production tool such as pliers on the top face of the connector cover and the knurled part on the back of the connector body, and push the connector cover into the connector body.

Check that with snaps, all the four large hooks of the connector cover (two on each side) are securely engaged into the connector body holes.

The appearance should be as shown below

fter all the steps have been completed. a

(3) Pressure welding at a position between flat cable ends

(a) Cut off the end face of the connector cover using a tool such as a nipper.

[Front view] [Side view]

Cut

(b) Check the pin numbers shown on the grooves on the internal surface of the connector cover and the flat cable orientation, and set the flat cable. (The black line is positioned on the hinge side of the connector cover.)

4

INS

TAL

LA

TIO

N T

O W

OR

K T

AB

LE

S

(c) Perform steps (a)-3), (a)-4), (b), and (c) for pressure welding at the flat cable end.

The appearance should be as shown below after all the steps have been completed.

Utilizing the combinations (of pressure welding at flat cable ends and at positions between the ends) allows three types of connections.

POINTPOINTPOINT

Pin alignment of the link connector

Cable colors of the flat cable for wiring and the link connector cable attached to each type of POKAYOKE terminal are partially different.

The link connector is a gender-neutral connector.

Pin No. Description

Cable color

Flat cable for wiring

Cable attached to ASLINK-

compatible electric

screwdriver

Cable attached to

ASLINKER

Cable attached to

POKAYOKE terminal

1 DN Black Black Black

2 DP Red Yellow Red

3 0 V White White White

4 24 V Brown Green Green

[Addition] [T-shape branching] [H-shape branching]

[Example of T-shape branching connection]

4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.5 Wiring AnyWireASLINK

4 - 33

4 - 34 4. INSTALLATION TO WORK TABLES4.6 Installing Other External Signal I/O Device

4.6 Installing Other External Signal I/O Devices

To connect indicator lights, buzzers, and external input devices to the CPU module in this application, connect terminals to the DC I/O conversion module (FA-TBS40P) connected to the CPU module with the supplied conversion cable (FA-SCBL10FMV-M).

The following table shows the DC I/O conversion module terminals to which indicator lights, buzzers, and external input switches are connected.

For the external I/O of the CPU module and the connection specifications of the DC I/O conversion module and conversion cable, refer to the following.

• External I/O of the CPU module: 3.6.1 Wiring• Connection specifications of the DC I/O conversion module (FA-TBS40P):

Appendix.1.8 Specifications of the DC I/O conversion module• Connection specifications of the conversion cable (FA-SCBL10FMV-M):

Appendix.1.9 Specifications of the connection cable for the DC I/O conversion module

Device nameTerminal or pin for connection

DC I/O conversion module CPU module side

Three-color

stack light

Upper lamp 33

39 or 40

OUT2

OUTCOM

Middle lamp 32 OUT1

Lower lamp 31 OUT0

Two-color

stack light

Green lamp 36 OUT5

Red lamp 37 OUT6

Buzzer34 OUT3

35 OUT4

External input switch 21 19 or 20 IN6 INCOM

4.7 Ethernet Connection

The following figure shows an Ethernet connection image for this application.

Personal computer for database server

Personal computer for the tool

Ethernet

Operation panelControl panel

GOTProgrammable controller system

Follow the above image and connect the personal comp

r for the database server, personal computer for the tool, utecontrol panel (programmable controller system), and operation panel (GOT) with Ethernet cables.

CAUTION• Use twisted pair cables with shields as Ethernet cables.• Attach ferrite cores on both sides of an Ethernet cable.

s

5

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5. SYSTEM SETTING

This chapter describes the system setting of the SCREW TIGHTENING Application.

5.1 Starting up the Programmable Controller

Power on and start the programmable controller.

5.2 Installing Sequence Programs

The following shows the procedure for installing sequence programs in the programmable controller.

POINTPOINTPOINT

For details of the operations on GX Works2, refer to the following.

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

CAUTION

Restrictions are applied to the following functions of GX Works2 in the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package project.

Function Description

Write to PLC

You cannot write only the execution program. (Write the program together with its

source information.)

You cannot write data to SD memory cards.

Write to IC Memory Card

Not availableWrite to IC Memory Card

(Edit and Data Copy)

Verify with PLC You cannot display details of verification results of the SCREW TIGHTENING

Application program "SCR002AA". (You can display only a list of verification results.)Verify

Device Display

You cannot use these functions for the SCREW TIGHTENING Application program

"SCR002AA".Batch Device Display

Display Compile Result

PrintYou cannot use the device display.

Print Preview

User Library You cannot register data in the user library.

CopyYou cannot use these functions for the SCREW TIGHTENING Application program

"SCR002AA".

5. SYSTEM SETTING.1 Starting up the Programmable Controller

5 - 1

5 - 2 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.2 Installing Sequence Programs

5.2.1 Preparing a GX Works2 project

Copy the following file in the "Project" folder on the installation DVD to the personal computer and clear the read-only attribute of the copy.

• AP10-SCR002AA-L02_*.****.gxw (*.**** indicates the

rsion.) ve

5.2.2 Reading a project

Open the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package project on GX Works2.

POINTPOINTPOINT

• When the following window appears, select all the items and click the [OK] button.

• The CPU type of the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package project stored in the installation DVD is "L02/L02-P". To use other CPU types, change the PLC type.

• If the PLC type is changed to "L26-BT/L26-PBT", change "Start XY" of the PLC parameter [I/O Assignment] as follows.

1. Run "GX Works2" from the Start menu of Windows.

2. Click [Project] → [Open] in the menu.

3. The "Open" window appears.

4. Select the copy of the file on the installation DVD and click the [Open] button.

5. The SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package project is opened.

Click.

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5.2.3 IP address setting

Set the IP address of the CPU module.

1. Select "Project" → "Parameter" and double-click "PLC Parameter" in the Navigation window.

2. The "L Parameter Setting" window appears.

3. Click the [Built-in Ethernet Port Setting] tab.

4. Set "IP Address Setting" according to the network environment used.

5. Click the [End] button.

Double-click.

Click.

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.2 Installing Sequence Programs

5 - 3

5 - 4 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.2 Installing Sequence Programs

5.2.4 Registering a license key

A license key can be registered in the CPU module by writing the license key and product ID to the following devices.

*1 Follow the "License Key Request Instructions" supplied with the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package to get a license key.

*2 This information is described in the "License Certificate" supplied with the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package.

Information to be registered Write target device

License key (64 characters)*1 ZR550 to ZR565

Product ID*23-digit number ZR566

9-digit number ZR567 to ZR568

Write the license information to the devices by one of the

llowing two methods. fo

(1) Using a ladder program

Add a ladder program in the program "KEY_LD"

.Refer to the following example and create a ladder program.

11AA12AB13AC14AD21BA22BB23BC24BD31CA32CB 33CC34CD41DA42DB43DC44DD

MOV H11AA ZR550

MOV H12AB ZR551

Snip

123-123456789

Product ID (example)License key (example)

SM400

MOV H43DC ZR564

MOV H44DD ZR565

MOV K123 ZR566

DMOV K123456789 ZR567

(2) Using an in-line ST box

Add an ST program in the in-line ST box in the p

gram "KEY_ST".

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

roRefer to the following example and create an ST program.

5.2.5 Customizing the project

Customize the project as needed.

POINTPOINTPOINT

For details of user customization, refer to the following.

7.1 User Program

11AA12AB13AC14AD21BA22BB23BC24BD31CA32CB 33CC34CD41DA42DB43DC44DD 123-123456789

Product ID (example)License key (example)

MOV(TRUE, H11AA, ZR550);MOV(TRUE, H12AB, ZR551);MOV(TRUE, H13AC, ZR552);MOV(TRUE, H14AD, ZR553);MOV(TRUE, H21BA, ZR554);MOV(TRUE, H22BB, ZR555);MOV(TRUE, H23BC, ZR556);MOV(TRUE, H24BD, ZR557);MOV(TRUE, H31CA, ZR558);MOV(TRUE, H32CB, ZR559);MOV(TRUE, H33CC, ZR560);MOV(TRUE, H34CD, ZR561);MOV(TRUE, H41DA, ZR562);MOV(TRUE, H42DB, ZR563);MOV(TRUE, H43DC, ZR564);MOV(TRUE, H44DD, ZR565);MOV(TRUE, K123, ZR566);DMOV(TRUE, K123456789, ZR567);

SM400

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.2 Installing Sequence Programs

5 - 5

5 - 6 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.2 Installing Sequence Programs

5.2.6 Writing the project

Write the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package project with GX Works2.

POINTPOINTPOINT

Convert and compile all the projects to complete the compilation in advance.

1. Select "Connection Destination" → "Current

Connection" and double-click "Connection1" in the Navigation window.

2. The "Transfer Setup" screen appears.

3. Configure the following settings and click the [OK] button.

• PC side I/F: Serial USB• PLC side I/F: PLC Module• Other Station Setting: No Specification

4. Click [Online] → [Write to PLC] in the menu.

5. The "Online Data Operation" screen appears.

6. Click the [Parameter+Program] button.

7. Click the [Execute] button.

Double-click.

Click.

Click.

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5.3 Starting up the GOT

Power on and start the GOT.

5.4 Installing Screen Data

The following shows the procedure for installing screen data in the GOT.

POINTPOINTPOINT

For details of the operations on GT Designer3, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

5.4.1 Preparing a GT Designer3 project

In the "Project" folder on the installation DVD, select one of the following files appropriate to the GOT used, copy the selected file to the personal computer, and then clear the read-only attribute of the copy.

• GT2715-XTBA: XGA (15 inches)

AP10-SCR002AA-GT2715X_*.****.gtx *1

• GT2512-STBA: SVGA (12 inches)

AP10-SCR002AA-GT2512S_*.****.gtx *1

*1 "*.****" indicates the version of the project.

5.4.2 Reading a project

Open the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package project on GT Designer3.

1. Run "GT Designer3" from the Start menu of

Windows.

2. Click [Project] → [Open] in the menu.

3. The "Open Project" window appears.

4. Select the copy of the file on the installation DVD and click the [Open] button.

Click.

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.3 Starting up the GOT

5 - 7

POINTPOINTPOINT

The message about the protection on scripts/object scripts is displayed. Click the [OK] button.

5.4.3 IP address setting

Set the IP address of the GOT.

5. The "User Authentication" window appears.

6. Enter the following information and click the [OK] button.

• User name: "Developer2"• Password: "2LDEVSCR"

7. The SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package project is opened.

Click.

5 - 8 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.4 Installing Screen Data

1. Click [Common] → [Controller Setting] in the menu.

2. The "Controller Setting" window appears.

3. Click "Controller Setting" → "CH1: MELSEC-L".

4. Set "Detail Setting" and "Ethernet Setting" according to the network environment used.

5. Click the [OK] button.

Click.

5.4.4 Setting the FTP server function

Set the FTP server function of the GOT.

POINTPOINTPOINT

This setting is required to transfer the data for GOTs to the SD memory card inserted in the GOT with the SCR Information editing Tool by Ethernet.

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

1. Click [Common] → [Controller Setting] in the menu.

2. The "Controller Setting" window appears.

3. Click "Network/Duplex Setting" → "Gateway" → "FTP Server".

4. Select "Use the function of FTP Server" and set "Login Name" and "Password".

The following shows the initial settings.Change them as needed.• Login name: "Admin"• Password: "00000000"

5. Click the [OK] button.

Click.

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.4 Installing Screen Data

5 - 9

5 - 10 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.4 Installing Screen Data

5.4.5 Setting the GOT MES interface function

Configure the settings to connect the GOT to the database server.

1. Click [Common] → [MES Interface] in the menu.

2. The "MESInterface" window appears.

3. Click the server service in "Server service settings" of "MES interface setting" in the [Setting] tab.Click.

4. Configure the following settings and click the [OK] button.

POINTPOINTPOINT

• Set the same value for "Port No." and "Service port", the setting item of the DB connection service setting tool.• Set the values of "Connection timeout" and "DB access timeout", the setting item of the DB connection service

setting tool, to satisfy the following condition.

Item Settings

Server service name Set "SQL_SV".

IP address

Set each item according to the personal computer for the database server,

the settings used when the database management system was installed, and

the network environment.

Port No. (1024 to 65535)

User name

Password

Confirm password

Data source name Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed.

Database type Select "SQL Server 2000/2005/2008/2008R2/2012/2014".

Access error notification setting Set whether to notify access errors.

Connection timeout (1 to 180)Set the timeout time (unit: second) on the GOT in the communication

between the GOT and database server.

Connection timeout setting value ≤ DB ac

ss timeout setting value ce

• For details of the setting items of the DB conne

n service setting tool, refer to the following. ctio

iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING Startup Manual (Database)

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5.4.6 Customizing the project

Customize the project as needed.

POINTPOINTPOINT

For details of user customization, refer to the following.

7.2 User Screen

5.4.7 Writing the project

Write the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package project to the GOT.

1. Click [Communication] → [Write to GOT] in the menu.

2. The "Communication Configuration" window appears.

3. Check that "PC side I/F" is "USB" and click the [OK] button.

4. The "Communicate with GOT" window appears.

5. Click the [GOT Write] tab to check that the settings have been configured as follows.

• [PC] Write Data: "Package Data"• [GOT] Destination Drive:

"C:Built-in Flash Memory"

6. Click the [GOT Write] button.

7. The window shown on the left appears.

8. Enter the following information and click the [OK] button.

Password: "NEJISHIMEDSP"

Click.

Click.

Click.

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.4 Installing Screen Data

5 - 11

5.5 Registering a License of the GOT MES Interface Function

To enable the GOT MES interface function of the GOT, register a license with the utility of the GOT.

POINTPOINTPOINT

For details of the utility, refer to the following.

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

The following shows the procedure for registering a license to the GOT.

9. The window shown on the left appears.

10.Click the [Yes] button.

11.The package data is written to the GOT.

1. Start up the utility of the GOT.

2. When the "Utility start authentication" window appears, enter the following information and touch the [Enter] switch.

Password: "NEJISHIMEUTL"

Click.

5 - 12 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.5 Registering a License of the GOT MES Interface Function

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

3. Touch the [Ext. func. set] tab and [License management].

4. The "License management" screen appears.

5. Touch the "License number" entry area of "MES interface function".

6. A keyboard appears at the bottom of the screen. Enter a license number and touch the [Enter] switch.

7. Touch the [Regist] switch on the "License management" screen to register the entered license number.

8. Touch the [×] switch to close the screen.

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.5 Registering a License of the GOT MES Interface Function

5 - 13

5 - 14 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.6 Inserting an SD Memory Card

5.6 Inserting an SD Memory Card

Insert an SD memory card in the GOT.

POINTPOINTPOINT

Select one of the following procedures depending on the method for transferring files for the GOT created with the SCR Information editing Tool.

• When using an SD memory card to transfer the filesInsert the SD memory card where the files have been transferred by executing [Transfer to SD Memory Card] of the SCR Information editing Tool in the GOT.

• When transferring the files by EthernetInsert an SD memory card in the GOT, and execute [File Transfer] of the SCR Information editing Tool.For details of file transfer, refer to the following.

iQ Monozukuri SCR Information editing Tool Instruction Manual

1. Make sure that the power to the GOT is off.

2. Open the SD memory card cover as shown in the left figure.

3. After making sure that the SD memory card access LED is off with the SD memory card cover 90 degrees or more open, insert the SD memory card in the SD memory card interface with its front side facing up.

4. Push and close the SD memory card cover until it clicks.

5. After the SD memory card cover is closed, the access to the SD memory card is allowed.

SD memory card access LED

Open the SD memory card cover 90 degrees or more.

5.7 Sta

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5.7 Starting up the SCREW TIGHTENING System

Start up the SCREW TIGHTENING System.

1. Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the LCPU in the RUN state.

2. Turn on the main power supply switch on the control panel to power on the GOT.

POINTPOINTPOINT

Power on the programmable controller and other devices first, and then power on the GOT.

3. The power supply lamp on the left of the GOT on the operation panel door turns on and the iQ Monozukuri logo appears on the GOT screen.

4. At the first startup of the SCREW TIGHTENING System, the "Language Setting" window appears.

5.8 Language Setting

5. The home screen of the SCREW TIGHTENING System appears.

5. SYSTEM SETTINGrting up the SCREW TIGHTENING System

5 - 15

5 - 16 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.8 Language Setting

5.8 Language Setting

Set a display language for the SCREW TIGHTENING System.

1. Touch at the upper right corner of the home screen.

2. The "Language Setting" window appears.

3. Touch one of the language switches.

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5.9 Clock Setting

Set the clock of the SCREW TIGHTENING System.

POINTPOINTPOINT

Synchronization of the time with the SNTP server

The function to synchronize the time with the SNTP server can be used by changing the following settings at

installation of screen data ( 5.4 Installing Screen Data).

1. Touch at the upper right corner of the home screen.

2. The "Clock Setting" window appears.

3. Set year, month, date, hour, minute, and second values with the [] and [] switches.

4. Touch the [Set] switch to set the clock.

• [Common] → [GOT Setup] → [Basic Setting] →

ime Setting] in the GT Designer3 menu [T

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.9 Clock Setting

5 - 17

5 - 18 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.10 Logging in as a Local Manager

5.10 Logging in as a Local Manager

Log in to the SCREW TIGHTENING System as a local manager.

POINTPOINTPOINT

• To log in to the system as a local manager, start with the non-login status.• The "Name" field in the "operator check" window displays "LocalManager" when an operator has logged into

the system as the local manager.• Log out in the "Work Input" screen. For details, refer to the following.

iQ Monozukuri SCREW TIGHTENING Operating Manual

1. Touch at the upper left corner of the home screen.

2. The "operator check" window appears.

3. Press and hold down the "Name" field (for two seconds).

4. The "password input" window for a local manager appears.

5. Enter the following password and touch the [ENT] switch.

Password: "SCR12345"

6. The icon at the upper left corner of the home screen will change.

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5.11 System Setting

Configure the settings related to the entire SCREW TIGHTENING System.

1. Touch the [Setting] switch in the home screen and [System Setting] in the sub menu.

2. The following screen appears. Change the settings as needed.

(1) Measured screw tightening time displaySelect whether or not to display the measured screw tightening time on the Assembly work step screen.• [Yes]: The time will be displayed in green at normal completion of screw tightening, or displayed in red at

completion of screw tightening with an error.• [No]: The time will not be displayed at normal completion of screw tightening, or displayed in red at

completion of screw tightening with an error.

(2) Screw tightening completion displaySelect whether or not to display the [Complete screw tightening] switch on the Assembly work step screen.Touching the [Complete screw tightening] switch completes screw tightening even if no electric screwdrivers have been connected.

(a) Sending to database when the complete screw tightening switch is pressedSelect whether or not to send data to the database even when screw tightening is completed with the [Complete screw tightening] switch just as at normal completion of screw tightening.This item can be selected only when "Screw tightening completion display" has been set to "Yes".

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.11 System Setting

5 - 19

5 - 20 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.11 System Setting

(3) OK data collectionSelect whether or not to send OK data at completion of screw tightening to the database.(This setting cannot be changed when no operator ID or order No. is set.)• [Enable]: OK data will be sent to the database.• [Disable]: OK data will not be sent to the database.

(4) Tightening time correctionSelect whether to enable or disable the tightening time correction function.(This setting cannot be changed when no operator ID or order No. is set.)• [Enable]: The [Tightening time correction] switch is displayed on the Assembly work step screen.• [Disable]: The tightening time correction cannot be executed.

POINTPOINTPOINT

When work is started with the tightening time correction function set to "Enable", the state of each indicator is as follows.

• The RUN state indicator indicates the "Waiting" state.• The indicator for screw tightening check flashes in green at a low speed.

(5) Hold screw box verification results (previous)Select whether or not to hold screw box verification results on the "Verify Screw Box" screen.• [Enable]: Positions of screw boxes are recorded. If the positions have not been changed from the last

verification, the screw box verification at the start of work can be omitted.• [Disable]: Positions of screw boxes are not recorded. Verification of screw boxes at the start of work are

required every start of screw tightening.

(6) Screw box verification touch operationSelect whether to enable or disable the screw box verification with touch operations.• [Enable]: Screw box verifications can be executed with a barcode reader or touch operations.• [Disable]: Screw box verifications can be executed only with a barcode reader.

(7) Start-up operation mode (This setting is available only for the line production method 1 and line production method 2.)Select the operation mode at the system startup.• [Coordinated operation]: Assembly work coordinates with the external system.• [Single operation]: Assembly work is performed without coordination with the external system.

3. Touch the [Register] switch to register the changed settings to the system.(Touching the [Cancel changes] switch discards the changed settings and returns to the status before the change.)

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting

Set the connections of ASLINK connected devices (electric screwdrivers and POKAYOKE terminals) and assign their start addresses.

1. Touch the [Setting] switch in the home screen and [ASLINK Setting] in the sub menu.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Set each item according to the procedures described in the next section or later.

POINTPOINTPOINT

All assignable start addresses are fixed values regardless of types of electric screwdrivers and terminals.The following tables list screwdriver numbers/screw shelf numbers and their start addresses.

(1) List of start addresses for electric screwdrivers

(2) List of start addresses for screw shelves

Screwdriver No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Start

address

ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36

Non ASLINK-

compatible

electric

screwdriver

Two-point input

ASLINKER0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36

One-point I/O

ASLINKER2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 38

Externally connected electric screwdriver - - - - - - - - - -

Screw shelf No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Start address 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85

Screw shelf No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Start address 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135

Screw shelf No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Start address 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting

5 - 21

5 - 22 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting

5.12.1 Electric screwdriver setting

Register types of electric screwdrivers to be used.

POINTPOINTPOINT

The start address of each of non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdrivers is displayed in two sections (upper/lower) of an "Address" display area.

• The start address with the green background is for a two-point input ASLINKER.• The start address with the gray background is for a one-point I/O ASLINKER.

1. Touch the "Type" entry area of a screwdriver No. to set the connection setting.

2. Enter the type of the electric screwdriver to be connected in the "value input" window.

0: Not used1: ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver

4.3.1 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver

2: Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver

4.3.2 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver

3: Externally connected electric screwdriver

4.3.3 Externally connected electric screwdriver

3. The start address for the ASLINK connected device is displayed in the "Address" display area.

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5.12.2 Screw shelf setting

Register types of terminals to be used on screw shelves.

POINTPOINTPOINT

Check the model of each POKAYOKE terminal corresponding to each terminal type on the "Model information" window.The "Model information" window appears when the [Model information] switch is touched.

1. Touch the "Type" entry area of a screw shelf No. to set the connection setting.

2. Enter the type of the terminal to be connected in the "value input" window.

0: Not used1: POKAYOKE terminal (1 light)2: POKAYOKE terminal (RGB)3: POKAYOKE terminal (1 light + door type)4: POKAYOKE terminal (RGB + door type)

3. The start address for the ASLINK connected device is displayed in the "Address" display area.

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting

5 - 23

5 - 24 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting

5.12.3 Terminal LED color setting

Set the LED color for each terminal.

5.12.4 Writing start addresses

Write the start addresses assigned in "5.12.1 Electric screwdriver setting" and "5.12.2 Screw shelf setting" to the ASLINK connected devices connected to the system.

1. Touch the [LED color setting] switch.

2. The "LED color setting" window appears.

3. Touch the switch of a color you want to set.

Use an address writer (ARW-02AS) to write the addresse

to the ASLINK connected devices. s The following describes the procedure of writing addresses with the address writer.

POINTPOINTPOINT

For details of how to set addresses, refer to the product manual supplied with the address writer.

(1) Part names

MODE DATA

R W

MODESELECT

POWERCLEAR

POWERFLICK

EX

SENSE

TIME

COLOR

CLOSE

ADR

OPEN

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8) 9)

No. Name Description No. Name Description

1) POWER/CLEAR Power ON/OFF button 6) + Setting value change button

2) POWER LEDThis LED turns on when the writer is powered

on and turns off when the writer is powered off.7) - Setting value change button

3) MODE SELECT Read/write target item selection button 8) R(READ)Touching this button reads the currently-

selected item.

4) Item LED A lamp of the currently-selected item turns on. 9) W(WRITE)Touching this button writes the currently-

selected item and current setting value.

5)7-segment display

area

This area displays a value of the currently-

selected item.

5

ET

TIN

G

(2) Startup procedure

(3) Writing addressesWrite the address as assigned in "5.12.1 Electric screwdriver setting" and "5.12.2 Screw shelf setting".

1. Press the POWER/CLEAR button to power on the address writer.

2. When the writer has been powered on, a beep is made and the POWER LED turns on.

Simultaneously, the current firmware version is displayed in the 7-segment display area for a few seconds.

3. Holding down the POWER/CLEAR button powers off the writer and the POWER LED turns off.

MODE DATA

MODESELECT

POWERCLEAR

MODE DATA

MODE POWER

POWERFLICK

EX

SENSE

TIME

COLOR

CLOSE

ADR

OPEN

S

S

YS

TE

M

1. Press the MODE SELECT button several times

until the ADR (Green) item LED turns on.

Indications by the item LED and 7-segment display are as shown below.

2. Set a value with the "+ button" and "- button".

3. Bring the address writer close to the light emitting/receiving window of the ASLINK connection device, and press "W (WRITE)" button.

When the write operation has normally been completed, the normal sound "beep" is made. When the write operation has failed, the error sound "bleep, bleep, bleep" is made.

MODE DATA

MODESELECT

POWERCLEAR

ON

R W

MODESELECT

POWERCLEAR

2.

3.

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting

5 - 25

5 - 26 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting

POINTPOINTPOINT

Errors at writing addresses

When an error has occurred at the execution of a write operation, press the W button one more time to perform the write operation again.While an error has occurred, the mode cannot be changed unless the POWER/CLEAR button is pressed to return the state of the writer to the one indicated before the occurrence of the error.When an error has occurred, the 7-segment display area indicates as shown below.

POINTPOINTPOINT

(1) Precautions for using transparent type POKAYOKE terminals

Current operation mode Only Err flashes.

Make sure to set the same start address to tra

parent-type terminals that are used in a pair. nsIf the start address values are different, proper operations are not performed.

(2) Precautions for using door-type POKAYOKE terminalsSet the following items for door-type POKAYOKE terminals as necessary.

(a) Arm (door) motion time settingThe pickup indicator light and the arm (door) work in an interlocked manner. When the pickup indicator light is turned on (output is turned on), the arm moves upward, and when the light is turned off (output is turned off), the arm automatically moves downward after a certain length of time. (There is no interlock between inputs from the pickup confirmation switch and the arm.)The delay time between the instant when the light is turned off and the instant when the arm (door) starts to move down can be selected from 10 values.

(b) Door opening/closing position settingThe arm lifting angle is set at seven levels up to approximately 180°.An adjustment can be performed to prevent the door from hitting a shelf or workpiece.

For details of the above settings, refer to the produ

anual supplied with the terminal. ct m

CAUTION

• Because the written addresses are enabled when writing is complete, the POKAYOKE terminal doors may open or close. Make sure to ensure safety before writing addresses.

• Do not change the addresses during the check operation.Doing so may change the outputs to ASLINK connected devices (lamps and opening/closing of terminal doors).

• Set addresses so that each terminal has a different address. Otherwise transmission trouble occurs.

• Setting the arm (door) motion time to "0" (Delay time: 0 second) may cause operators' hands to be caught. Set the arm (door) motion time to "1" (Delay time: 1 second) or longer and adjust the door opening/closing position setting depending on the system in use.

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

5.12.5 Reflecting to the system

When "5.12.4 Writing start addresses" has been completed, the changed settings are reflected to the system.

1. Touch the [Register] switch of "ASLINK Setting".(Touching the [Cancel changes] switch discards the changed settings and returns to the status before the change.)

2. The ASLINK outputs temporarily turn off.

3. The changed settings are registered to the system.

4. The addresses of the ASLINK connected devices connected to the system are written to the AnyWireASLINK master module by the "address auto recognition function" of the AnyWireASLINK master module.

POINTPOINTPOINT

For the "address auto recognition function" of the AnyWireASLINK master module, refer to the following.

MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

5. The ASLINK outputs return to the ON state.

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting

5 - 27

5 - 28 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.13 Electric Screwdriver Setting

5.13 Electric Screwdriver Setting

Configure the settings related to the electric screwdrivers to be connected.

1. Touch the [Setting] switch in the home screen and [Electric Screwdriver Setting] in the sub menu.

2. The following screen appears.

POINTPOINTPOINT

• The connection status of each electric screwdriver displayed on this screen is based on the electric screwdriver type registered in "5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting".

• "ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color" and "Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color" cannot be set for externally connected electric screwdrivers.

3. Touch the "Electric screwdriver code" entry area of a screwdriver No. to set the connection setting.

4. Enter the electric screwdriver code (000 to 999) of an electric screwdriver to be connected in the "value input" window.

POINTPOINTPOINT

When the value input window is displayed, a barcode reader can be used to read the barcode of an electric screwdriver code.

5

SY

ST

EM

SE

TT

ING

POINTPOINTPOINT

ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color setting

• When an ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver has been connected, set the color of the LED built in the electric screwdriver.(Select one of seven colors of green, blue, yellow, purple (magenta), sky blue (cyan), red, and white as the LED color.)

Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color setting

• When a non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver has been connected, set the display color on the GOT screen.

5. Touch the [Screw color] switch.

6. The "Screw color setting" window appears.

7. Touch the switch of the color you want to set to an electric screwdriver connected to the system.(Changing a screw color also changes a corresponding ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color.)

8. When an ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver is connected, touch the [ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color] switch.

9. The "ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color setting" window appears.

10.Touch the switch of the color you want to set to an electric screwdriver connected to the system.

11.When a non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver is connected, touch the [Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color] switch.

12.The "Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color setting" window appears.

13.Touch the switch of the color you want to set to an electric screwdriver connected to the system.

14.Touch the [Register] switch to register the changed settings to the system.(Touching the [Cancel changes] switch discards the changed settings and returns to the status before the change.)

5. SYSTEM SETTING5.13 Electric Screwdriver Setting

5 - 29

5 - 30 5. SYSTEM SETTING5.14 RUN State Indicator Setting

5.14 RUN State Indicator Setting

Configure the settings related to RUN state indicators.

1. Touch the [Setting] switch in the home screen and [RUN State Indicator Setting] in the sub menu.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Select whether or not to operate each indicator to correspond with each state with the [Enable] and [Disable] switches.

4. Select and touch one of the [Upper], [Middle], and [Lower] switches for the indicator position of the three-color stack light for each state.

5. Select and touch one of the [Low-speed flash], [High-speed flash], and [ON] switches for the indicator status of the indicator at each position.

6. Touch the [Register] switch to register the changed settings to the system.(Touching the [Cancel changes] switch discards the changed settings and returns to the status before the change.)

POINTPOINTPOINT

If several states simultaneously occur at the same indicator position, the indicator will operate with the priority of each state.The following shows the priority of each state.

(Priority: low) State on the left < State on the right (Priority: high)

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

6. OPERATION CHECK

This chapter describes how to check the settings and operation of the SCREW TIGHTENING System.

6.1 Checking with the Inspection Function

This section describes how to check the operation with the inspection function of the SCREW TIGHTENING System.

6.1.1 Electric screwdriver inspection

1. Touch the [Inspection] switch in the home screen and [Electric Screwdriver Inspection] in the sub menu.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Touch the [Enable] switch of "Electric screwdriver inspection mode".

4. Touch the [Electric screwdriver No.] switch to select an electric screwdriver to be an inspection target (multiple screwdrivers can be selectable).(As soon as "Electric screwdriver inspection mode" is enabled, all the connected electric screwdrivers will be selected as inspection targets.)

POINTPOINTPOINT

• Power will be supplied to the electric screwdrivers selected as inspection targets and the [Supply power] lamps will turn on.

• The [ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color] lamp turns on when a non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver is selected as an inspection target. (The lamp turns on in the color set in "5.13 Electric Screwdriver Setting".)

• The inspection function cannot be used for externally connected electric screwdrivers.

5. Operate the electric screwdriver to check if "Start signal", "Torque-up signal", and "Reverse signal" are properly detected.

6. OPERATION CHECK6.1 Checking with the Inspection Function

6 - 1

6 - 2 6. OPERATION CHECK6.1 Checking with the Inspection Function

6. Touch each switch of "ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color" to check each LED color of the electric screwdriver. When the [Set color] switch is touched, the LED turns on in the color set in "5.13 Electric Screwdriver Setting".(The LED colors can be set only to ASLINK-compatible electric screwdrivers.)

7. To end the check, touch the [Disable] switch of "Electric screwdriver inspection mode".

6.1.2 Screw shelf inspection

1. Touch the [Inspection] switch in the home screen and [Screw Shelf Inspection] in the sub menu.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Touch the [Enable] switch of "Screw shelf inspection mode".

4. Touch the [Output] switch corresponding to a screw shelf No. to select a screw shelf to be an inspection target (multiple screw shelves can be selectable).

POINTPOINTPOINT

• The outputs of the screw shelves selected as inspection targets to terminals turn on.• To turn off the outputs to the terminals, touch the [Output] switch again.• When inputs from the terminals are detected, the [Input] lamp corresponding to the "screw shelf No." turns on.

5. Check if the screw shelf operates properly. (opening/closing of doors, LED, and input detection)

6. Touch each switch of "Terminal LED Color" to check the LED color of each terminal. When the [Set color] switch is touched, the LED turns on in the color set in "5.12 ASLINK Connected Device Setting".(The LED color setting can be applied to only RGB display type terminals.)

7. To end the check, touch the [Disable] switch of "Screw shelf inspection mode".

CAUTIONThe doors of door-type terminals open or close when terminal outputs turn on/off.Make sure to ensure safety before inspections.

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

6.1.3 Other devices inspection

1. Touch the [Inspection] switch in the home screen and [Other Devices Inspection] in the sub menu.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Touch the [Enable] switch of "Other devices inspection mode".

4. Touch the [ON] and [OFF] switches of "Indicator for screw tightening check" for each color to check that the indicator properly turns on.

5. Touch the [ON] and [OFF] switches of "RUN state indicator" at each step to check that the indicator properly turns on.

6. Touch the [Output] switch of "OK buzzer" to check that OK buzzer properly sounds.

7. Touch the [Output] switch of "NG buzzer" to check that NG buzzer properly sounds.

8. Scan a barcode with a barcode reader and check that correct character strings are displayed in the "Barcode data" area.

9. Operate external switches and check that the [Input signal ON] lamp properly turns on.

10.To end the check, touch the [Disable] switch of "Other devices inspection mode".

6. OPERATION CHECK6.1 Checking with the Inspection Function

6 - 3

6 - 4 6. OPERATION CHECK6.2 Checking with the Alarm Function

6.2 Checking with the Alarm Function

This section describes how to check the operation with the alarm function of the SCREW TIGHTENING System.This function displays errors of the SCREW TIGHTENING System as alarms.This function displays the alarms that have occurred or those that have already been solved in a list.

POINTPOINTPOINT

Up to 512 alarms can be saved into an SD memory card.(When the number of alarms exceeds the maximum number of alarms, the alarms will overwritten with new alarms from the oldest one.)

For details of each alarm, refer to "6.5 Troubleshoo

g". tin

6.2.1 Pop-up display

The alarm that has occurred pops up on the top of the GOT screen.

POINTPOINTPOINT

• When multiple alarms have occurred, only the latest alarm is displayed.• When a system alarm and an alarm occur simultaneously, a priority is given to the system alarm (only the

system alarm is displayed).

6.2.2 Current alarms

This screen lists the alarms that have occurred.

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

1. Touch the [Alarm] switch on the home screen.Or touch the [Current Alarms] switch on the "Alarm History" screen or "System Alarm" screen.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Check the alarm details and eliminate the alarm causes.

4. To reset all the alarms, press and hold down the [Reset alarm] switch (for two seconds).

POINTPOINTPOINT

Up to 512 alarms can be displayed. When the number of alarms exceeds the maximum number of alarms, the alarms will be deleted from the oldest one.

6. OPERATION CHECK6.2 Checking with the Alarm Function

6 - 5

6 - 6 6. OPERATION CHECK6.2 Checking with the Alarm Function

6.2.3 Alarm history

This screen lists the alarms that have occurred and the alarms that have already been solved.

1. Touch the [Alarm History] switch on the "Current Alarms" screen or "System Alarm" screen.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Touching the row of an alarm selects the alarm.

4. To delete the selected alarm, press and hold down the [Delete] switch (for two seconds).To delete all the alarms, press and hold down the [Delete all] switch (for two seconds).

POINTPOINTPOINT

Up to 512 alarms can be displayed. When the number of alarms exceeds the maximum number of alarms, the alarms will be deleted from the oldest one.

6.3

6.3 Checking with the System Alarm Function

This section describes how to check the operation with the system alarm function of the SCREW TIGHTENING System.This function displays GOT errors, CPU errors, and network errors as system alarms.This function displays the system alarms that have occurred or those that have already been solved in a list.

POINTPOINTPOINT

Up to 512 system alarms can be stored into an SD memory card.(When the number of alarms exceeds the maximum number of alarms, the alarms will overwritten with new alarms from the oldest one.)

For details of each system alarm, refer to the follow

.

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

ing

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

6.3.1 Pop-up display

The system alarm that has occurred pops up on the bottom of the GOT screen.Touching the pop-up display resets the system alarm.

POINTPOINTPOINT

• When multiple system alarms have occurred, only the latest system alarm is displayed.• When a system alarm and an alarm occur simultaneously, a priority is given to the system alarm (only the

system alarm is displayed).

6. OPERATION CHECK Checking with the System Alarm Function

6 - 7

6 - 8 6. OPERATION CHECK6.3 Checking with the System Alarm Function

6.3.2 System alarm

This screen lists the system alarms that have occurred and the system alarms that have already been solved.

1. Touch the [System Alarm] switch on the "Current Alarms" screen or "Alarm History" screen.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Touching the row of a system alarm selects the system alarm.

4. To delete the selected alarm, press and hold down the [Delete] switch (for two seconds).To delete all the alarms, press and hold down the [Delete all] switch (for two seconds).

POINTPOINTPOINT

• Up to 512 system alarms can be displayed. When the number of system alarms exceeds the maximum number of system alarms, the system alarms will be deleted from the oldest one.

• The system alarms cannot be reset on this screen. Touch the pop-up display ( 6.3.1 Pop-up display) displayed at the bottom of the GOT screen.

6.4

6.4 Checking with the Free Operation Function

This section describes how to check the operation with the free operation function of the SCREW TIGHTENING System.

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

1. Touch the [Free Operation] switch on the home screen.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Touch the [Enable] switch of "Free operation mode".

4. Operate the connected electric screwdrivers to check if the electric screwdrivers properly operate.

POINTPOINTPOINT

• The free operation cannot operate multiple electric screwdrivers simultaneously. Once an electric screwdriver starts operating, power supply to the other electric screwdrivers will stop.

• When an externally connected electric screwdriver is operated, power supply to the other electric screwdrivers will continue.

5. When door-type screw shelves have been used, touch the [Open] and [Close] switches to check if the doors properly open and close.

6. To end the operation check, touch the [Disable] switch of "Free operation mode".

6. OPERATION CHECKChecking with the Free Operation Function

6 - 9

6 - 10 6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6.5 Troubleshooting

For the troubleshooting for when an error has occurred in the SCREW TIGHTENING System, use one of the following methods.

• Searching for a recovery method from the function or

nected device where the error has occurred con

6.5.1 Troubleshooting by symptom

• Searching for a recovery method from the error message or alarm history displayed on the GOT screen

6.5.2 List of error messages

6.5.1 Troubleshooting by symptom

Troubleshooting related to the CPU module and GOT

Troubleshooting related to electric screwdrivers

Symptom Check detail Corrective action

The version mismatch screen

appears.

(The versions of the CPU

module and the GOT are

mismatched.)

Are the version of the sequence program in the CPU

module and the version of the screen data in the GOT

matched?

When the versions are different, reinstall the ladder

program to the CPU module or the screen data to the

GOT from the installation DVD.

The application version

mismatch screen appears.

Are the versions of applications installed in the CPU

module and GOT matched?

When the versions are different, reinstall the ladder

program to the CPU module or the screen data to the

GOT from the installation DVD.

Have the CPU module and GOT been restarted after

the installation of the projects in the CPU module and

GOT?

When they have not been restarted, restart them.

The CPU module has an error.

Has a license key been registered?

When no license key has been registered, follow the

installation procedure and register a license key in the

CPU module.

Is the combination of the serial number of the CPU

module and the license key correct?

• Register a license key in the CPU module with a serial

number used to request the license key.

• If an error occurs even when a license key has been

registered in the CPU module with a serial number

used to request the license key, contact the following.

Please send all inquiries concerning the License Key

Request form to:

iQ Monozukuri Office, Nagoya Works, Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation

[email protected]

Symptom Check detail Corrective action

Power is not supplied to an

electric screwdriver.

Has the plug of the electric screwdriver been properly

inserted?Check the connection of the plug.

Have the terminals of the electric screwdriver and

output module been correctly wired?Check the wiring.

Has the wiring between the electric screwdriver and

output module not been disconnected?Check for a disconnection of wiring.

Is the electric screwdriver not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

Is the output module not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

When non ASLINK-compatible

electric screwdrivers have been

used, start signals, reverse

signals, and torque-up signals

cannot be correctly acquired.

Have ASLINKER and electric screwdrivers been

correctly wired?Check the wiring.

Has the wiring between ASLINKER and electric

screwdrivers not been disconnected?Check for a disconnection of wiring.

Is the electric screwdriver not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

Is ASLINKER not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

When non ASLINK-compatible

electric screwdrivers have been

used, the lamps connected to

ASLINKER do not turn on.

Have ASLINKER and lamps been correctly wired? Check the wiring.

Has the wiring between ASLINKER and lamps not

been disconnected?Check for a disconnection of wiring.

Are the lamps not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

When ASLINK-compatible

electric screwdrivers have been

used, the LEDs of an electric

screwdriver do not turn on.

Is the electric screwdriver not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

Troubleshooting related to POKAYOKE terminals

Troubleshooting related to the barcode reader

Symptom Check detail Corrective action

The LINK lamp does not flash.

Has the POKAYOKE terminal been correctly wired? Check the wiring.

Has the wiring of the POKAYOKE terminal not been

disconnected or short-circuited?Check for a disconnection of wiring.

Is the pin assignment of the link connector correct? Review the pin assignment of the link connector.

Is the wiring of the 24 V DC external power supply for

the terminal blocks of the master module and slave

module correct?

Check the wiring of the 24 V DC external power supply.

Is the POKAYOKE terminal not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

The LEDs of the POKAYOKE

terminals or opening/closing of

terminal doors do not correctly

function.

Are the models of the POKAYOKE terminals installed

on the screw shelf and the terminal types set on the

"ASLINK Setting" screen matched?

Check the models and terminal types of the POKAYOKE

terminals.

When a transparent-type

terminal has been used, the

LEDs of the terminal do not turn

off.

When an output of a screw shelf No. is turned on in

the "Screw Shelf Inspection" screen, does a

corresponding LED of the terminal turn on?

Adjust the optical axis of the infrared light emitting/

received from/at the transparent-type terminal.

Has the light emission terminal been connected? Connect the light emission terminal.

Are the addresses of the light emission terminal and

light reception terminal matched?

Match the addresses of the light emission terminal and

light reception terminal.

When a transparent-type

terminal has been used, the

LEDs of the light emission

terminal do not turn on.

Has the light emission terminal been connected? Connect the light emission terminal.

Are the addresses of the light emission terminal and

light reception terminal matched?

Match the addresses of the light emission terminal and

light reception terminal.

When a transparent-type

terminal has been used, the

terminal does not detect objects

such as inserted hands.

Does the LED of the transparent-type terminal turn

on?

Adjust the amount of the infrared light emitting/received

from/at the transparent-type terminal.

When a door-type terminal has

been used, the door does not

open and close.

Are the arm lifting angle and lowering angle of the

door-type terminal correct?

(Use the address writer to check them.)

Adjust the arm lifting angle and lowering angle of the door-

type terminal.

(Set a value larger than the arm lowering angle for the

arm lifting angle.)

When door-type terminals have

been used, a voltage drop error

occurs after the batch ON/OFF

is performed on the "Screw

Shelf Inspection" screen.

Does the total power consumption of the devices

connected to the 24 V DC external power supply

exceed the maximum output power?

• Replace the power supply with a new one that has

larger maximum output power.

• Do not perform the batch ON/OFF of door-type

terminals.

When door-type terminals have

been used, the doors of door-

type terminals interfere with

each other after the batch ON/

OFF is performed on the

"Screw Shelf Inspection".

-

• Set screw shelves to prevent the doors from being

interfered with each other.

• Adjust the opening/closing angles of the door-type

terminals.

Symptom Check detail Corrective action

Power is not supplied to the

barcode reader.

Has the AC adopter of the barcode reader been

correctly connected?Check the connection of the plug.

Is the barcode reader not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

A read barcode or 2D code is

not reflected on the GOT

screen.

Have the barcode reader and the RS-232 connector

of the GOT been correctly connected?Check the wiring.

Have the wiring of the barcode reader and RS-232

connector of the GOT not been disconnected?Check for a disconnection of wiring.

6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6 - 11

6 - 12 6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting related to external input devices

Troubleshooting related to indicator lights

Troubleshooting related to the buzzer

Symptom Check detail Corrective action

An external input switch does

not function when it is powered

on.

Does the GOT display the "Assembly work step"

screen or the "Other Devices Inspection" screen?

Switch the display of the GOT to the "Assembly work

step" screen or the "Other Devices Inspection" screen.

(External input switches do not function on the screens

other than above.)

Has the external input switch been correctly wired? Check the wiring.

Have the wiring of the external input switch not been

disconnected?Check for a disconnection of wiring.

Is the external input switch not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

Symptom Check detail Corrective action

An indicator does not turn on.

Has the indicator been correctly wired? Check the wiring.

Has the wiring of the indicator not been

disconnected?Check for a disconnection of wiring.

Is the indicator not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

The RUN state indicator do not

operate in the way set on the

"RUN State Indicator Setting"

screen.

Has the indicator been correctly wired? Check the wiring.

Is the indicator not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

The LED colors for screw

tightening OK and screw

tightening NG have been

switched.

Has the indicator been correctly wired? Check the wiring.

Is the indicator not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

Symptom Check detail Corrective action

The buzzer does not sound.

Has the buzzer been correctly wired? Check the wiring.

Has the wiring of the buzzer not been disconnected? Check for a disconnection of wiring.

Is the buzzer not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

The sounds of the OK buzzer

and NG buzzer have been

switched.

Has the buzzer been correctly wired? Check the wiring.

Is the buzzer not faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

Troubleshooting related to the screen display and operationsSymptom Check detail Corrective action

The "Work Table Setting"

screen, "ASLINK Setting"

screen, "Electric Screwdriver

Setting" screen, "System

Setting" screen, and "RUN

State Indicator Setting" screen

cannot be switched to other

screens.

Has the setting in the screen been changed?

• Touch the [Register] switch to confirm the changes.

• Touch the [Cancel changes] switch to discard the

changes.

The background of an electric

screwdriver code is red on the

"Electric Screwdriver Setting"

screen.

Has the electric screwdriver code with the red

background already been registered?

When it has already been registered, change the electric

screwdriver code.

(Electric screwdrivers operate properly even though their

codes overlap each other.)

The free operation mode cannot

be enabled on the "Free

Operation" screen.

Has any major alarm occurred?

Clear the major alarm.

(When a major alarm has occurred, the free operation

mode cannot be enabled.)

The "Free Operation" screen

cannot be switched to other

screens.

Has the free operation mode been enabled?

Disable the free operation mode.

(When the free operation mode has been enabled, the

screen cannot be switched to other screens.)

The electric screwdriver

inspection mode cannot be

enabled on the "Electric

Screwdriver Inspection" screen.

Has any major alarm occurred?

Clear the major alarm.

(When a major alarm has occurred, the electric

screwdriver inspection mode cannot be enabled.)

The "Electric Screwdriver

Inspection" screen cannot be

switched to other screens.

Has the electric screwdriver inspection mode been

enabled?

Disable the electric screwdriver inspection mode.

(When the electric screwdriver inspection mode has been

enabled, the screen cannot be switched to other screens.)

Electric screwdriver numbers

cannot be switched or

deselected on the "Electric

Screwdriver Inspection" screen.

Are the electric screwdrivers operating?

Stop the electric screwdrivers.

(While the electric screwdrivers are operating, the electric

screwdriver numbers cannot be switched or deselected.)

The screw shelf inspection

mode cannot be enabled on the

"Screw Shelf Inspection"

screen.

Has any major alarm occurred?

Clear the major alarm.

(When a major alarm has occurred, the screw shelf

inspection mode cannot be enabled.)

The "Screw Shelf Inspection"

screen cannot be switched to

other screens.

Has the screw shelf inspection mode been enabled?

Disable the screw shelf inspection mode.

(When the screw shelf inspection mode has been

enabled, the screen cannot be switched to other screens.)

When terminal LED colors were

switched on the "Screw Shelf

Inspection" screen, the changes

are not reflected to the

POKAYOKE terminals.

Have RGB display type terminals been used? Use RGB display type POKAYOKE terminals.

Is the terminal type setting correct?Set a correct terminal type according to the model of the

POKAYOKE terminal.

The other devices inspection

mode cannot be enabled on the

"Other Devices Inspection"

screen.

Has any major alarm occurred?

Clear the major alarm.

(When a major alarm has occurred, the other devices

inspection mode cannot be enabled.)

The "Other Devices Inspection"

screen cannot be switched to

other screens.

Has the other devices inspection mode been

enabled?

Disable the other devices inspection mode.

(When the other devices inspection mode has been

enabled, the screen cannot be switched to other screens.)

The "Security Level

Authentication" window

appeared when the screen was

switched to a setting screen.

Has anyone logged into the system? Log in to the system.

The "Security Level

Authentication" window

appeared when the screen was

switched to the "Verify Screw

Box" screen.

Has the operator logged into as a manager or local

manager?Log into the system as a manager or local manager.

The message "The backup

processing has failed." is

displayed in the "Backup/

Restoration" screen.

Is the "Installation of USB memory" lamp in the screen

on?When the lamp is off, insert the USB memory again.

Is the USB memory faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

Is the free space in the USB memory sufficient?Secure the free space of 10 MB or more in the USB

memory.

6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6 - 13

Troubleshooting related to the database

The message "The restoration

processing has failed." is

displayed in the "Backup/

Restoration" screen.

Is the "Installation of USB memory" lamp in the screen

on?When the lamp is off, insert the USB memory again.

Is the USB memory faulty? When it is faulty, replace it with a new one.

Have the following backup files been stored in the

USB memory?

• SCR_Backupall.G2P

• SCR_Backupa2.G2P

When they have not been stored in the USB memory,

replace the USB memory with the one that stores the

backup files.

Symptom Check detail Corrective action

A server communication error

and alarm are displayed and the

operation is interrupted.

Has a license for the GOT MES interface function

been registered?

Start up the utility of the GOT and touch the [Ext. func. set]

tab and [License management] to register a license for the

GOT MES interface function.

Is the database server operating?Start up the personal computer for the database server to

operate the database server.

Has the database server been installed?Install the database server on the personal computer for

the database server.

Is the connection setting of the database server

correct?Check the connection setting of the database server.

Is the network between the GOT and the personal

computer for the database server disconnected?Check the wiring of the network.

An operator entered his/her

operator ID but was not able to

log in to the database server.

Has the operator ID been registered in the database

server?

• Register the operator information with the SCR

Information editing Tool.

• Enter the registered operator ID to log in to the

database server.

Has the operator code appropriate to the factory ID,

equipment ID, and work table ID been registered?

• Register the operator assignment with the SCR

Information editing Tool.

• Check the work table settings.

The input order No. is not

accepted.

Has the order No. been registered in the database

server?

• Register the order No. information with the SCR

Information editing Tool.

Has the order No. appropriate to the factory ID,

equipment ID, and work table ID been registered?

• Register the order No. information with the SCR

Information editing Tool.

• Check the work table settings.

Are the set number of work tables and the set work

number correct?Check the work table settings.

Symptom Check detail Corrective action

6 - 14 6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6.5.2 List of error messages

The following table lists the error messages and the recovery methods.

Error messages displayed on the GOT screen[Alarm level]Severe: Errors that interrupt the operation and require the restart of the system for recoveryMedium: Errors that interrupt the operation and do not require the restart of the system for recoveryMinor: Errors that do not interrupt the work

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

Error

codeError name

Alarm

levelError details and cause Corrective action

H1199 CPU STOP state Severe The CPU module is in the STOP state. Clear the STOP state of the CPU module.

H1200

Electric screwdriver No.1

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

Severe

• The wiring of the electric screwdriver has

been disconnected.

• An ASLINK-compatible electric

screwdriver or ASLINKER is faulty.

• The configuration of the electric

screwdriver has changed after the ASLINK

address auto recognition.

• Check for disconnections of the whole

transmission cables.

• Review the pin assignment of the link

connector.

• Check the wiring of signal wires of the master

module terminal block.

• After the configuration of electric screwdrivers

is changed, perform the ASLINK address auto

recognition.

• When the ASLINK-compatible electric

screwdriver or the LINK LED of ASLINKER

does not flash, check for the wiring around the

device.

H1201

Electric screwdriver No.2

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

H1202

Electric screwdriver No.3

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

H1203

Electric screwdriver No.4

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

H1204

Electric screwdriver No.5

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

H1205

Electric screwdriver No.6

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

H1206

Electric screwdriver No.7

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

H1207

Electric screwdriver No.8

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

H1208

Electric screwdriver No.9

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

H1209

Electric screwdriver No.10

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection

6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6 - 15

H1216

Screw shelf No.1 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

Severe

• The wiring of the screw shelf has been

disconnected.

• Any of POKAYOKE terminals on the screw

shelf is faulty.

• The configuration of the screw shelf has

changed after the ASLINK address auto

recognition.

• Check for disconnections of the whole

transmission cables.

• Review the pin assignment of the link

connector.

• Check the wiring of signal wires of the master

module terminal block.

• After the configuration of the screw shelf is

changed, perform the ASLINK address auto

recognition.

• When the LINK LED of the POKAYOKE

terminal does not flash, check the wiring

around the device.

H1217

Screw shelf No.2 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1218

Screw shelf No.3 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1219

Screw shelf No.4 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1220

Screw shelf No.5 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1221

Screw shelf No.6 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1222

Screw shelf No.7 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1223

Screw shelf No.8 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1224

Screw shelf No.9 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1225

Screw shelf No.10 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1226

Screw shelf No.11 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1227

Screw shelf No.12 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1228

Screw shelf No.13 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1229

Screw shelf No.14 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1230

Screw shelf No.15 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1231

Screw shelf No.16 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1232

Screw shelf No.17 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1233

Screw shelf No.18 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1234

Screw shelf No.19 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1235

Screw shelf No.20 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1236

Screw shelf No.21 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

Error

codeError name

Alarm

levelError details and cause Corrective action

6 - 16 6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

H1237

Screw shelf No.22 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

Severe

• The wiring of the screw shelf has been

disconnected.

• Any of POKAYOKE terminals on the screw

shelf is faulty.

• The configuration of the screw shelf has

changed after the ASLINK address auto

recognition.

• Check for disconnections of the whole

transmission cables.

• Review the pin assignment of the link

connector.

• Check the wiring of signal wires of the master

module terminal block.

• After the configuration of the screw shelf is

changed, perform the ASLINK address auto

recognition.

• When the LINK LED of the POKAYOKE

terminal does not flash, check the wiring

around the device.

H1238

Screw shelf No.23 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1239

Screw shelf No.24 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1240

Screw shelf No.25 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1241

Screw shelf No.26 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1242

Screw shelf No.27 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1243

Screw shelf No.28 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1244

Screw shelf No.29 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1245

Screw shelf No.30 ASLINK

transmission cable

disconnection

H1249ASLINK transmission cable

short-circuit errorSevere

• The ASLINK wiring has been short-

circuited.

• The current consumption has exceeded

the maximum power supply current.

• Check for the short-circuit of wiring and

miswiring.

• Review the pin assignment of the link

connector.

• Check the cable length, terminal models, and

the number of connected devices so that the

total current consumption of all the slave

modules does not exceed the power supply

current for the transmission cable of the master

module.

H1250ASLINK transmission cable

voltage drop errorSevere

• The voltage of the 24 V DC external power

supply is insufficient.

• The ASLINK wiring is not correct.

• Adjust the power supply voltage of the 24 V DC

external power supply so that it is within the

rated voltage (21.6 to 27.6 V DC).

(Recommended voltage: 26.4 V DC)

• Check for short-circuits and disconnections of

wiring.

• Review the pin assignment of the link

connector.

• Check the wiring of the 24 V DC external power

supply of the terminal blocks of the master

module and slave modules.

H1251ASLINK connected device

parameter setting errorSevere

• The addresses of the ASLINK connected

devices have been duplicated.

• The addresses of the ASLINK connected

devices have not been set.

• Malfunctions of the ASLINK connected

devices have been detected.

• An ASLINK connected device has

detected an error.

• A user program made an unauthorized

access to an ASLINK connected device.

• Check the addresses of the ASLINK connected

devices.

• Remove the ASLINK connected devices with

the addresses outside the range used by this

system.

• Remove the ASLINK connected device that

has detected a malfunction.

• Remove the ASLINK connected device that

has detected an error.

• After the configuration of the electric

screwdriver or screw shelf is changed, perform

the ASLINK address auto recognition.

• Check the user program.

Error

codeError name

Alarm

levelError details and cause Corrective action

6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6 - 17

H1252Electric screwdriver No.1

address mismatch

Severe

• The system has detected a device with an

incorrect address in the address area used

by electric screwdrivers.

• ASLINK connected devices with the same

start addresses as the specified

addresses of electric screwdrivers have

not been connected.

• Check the address settings of ASLINK-

compatible electric screwdrivers and

ASLINKER.

• After the configuration of electric screwdrivers

is changed, perform the ASLINK address auto

recognition.

H1253Electric screwdriver No.2

address mismatch

H1254Electric screwdriver No.3

address mismatch

H1255Electric screwdriver No.4

address mismatch

H1256Electric screwdriver No.5

address mismatch

H1257Electric screwdriver No.6

address mismatch

H1258Electric screwdriver No.7

address mismatch

H1259Electric screwdriver No.8

address mismatch

H1260Electric screwdriver No.9

address mismatch

H1261Electric screwdriver No.10

address mismatch

H1268Screw shelf No.1 POKAYOKE

terminal address mismatch

Severe

• The system has detected a device with an

incorrect address in the address area used

by screw shelves.

• ASLINK connected devices with the same

start addresses as the specified

addresses of screw shelves have not been

connected.

• Check the address settings of the POKAYOKE

terminals.

• After the configuration of the screw shelf is

changed, perform the ASLINK address auto

recognition.

H1269Screw shelf No.2 POKAYOKE

terminal address mismatch

H1270Screw shelf No.3 POKAYOKE

terminal address mismatch

H1271Screw shelf No.4 POKAYOKE

terminal address mismatch

H1272Screw shelf No.5 POKAYOKE

terminal address mismatch

H1273Screw shelf No.6 POKAYOKE

terminal address mismatch

H1274Screw shelf No.7 POKAYOKE

terminal address mismatch

H1275Screw shelf No.8 POKAYOKE

terminal address mismatch

H1276Screw shelf No.9 POKAYOKE

terminal address mismatch

H1277

Screw shelf No.10

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1278

Screw shelf No.11

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1279

Screw shelf No.12

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1280

Screw shelf No.13

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

Error

codeError name

Alarm

levelError details and cause Corrective action

6 - 18 6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

H1281

Screw shelf No.14

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

Severe

• The system has detected a device with an

incorrect address in the address area used

by screw shelves.

• ASLINK connected devices with the same

start addresses as the specified

addresses of screw shelves have not been

connected.

• Check the address settings of the POKAYOKE

terminals.

• After the configuration of the screw shelf is

changed, perform the ASLINK address auto

recognition.

H1282

Screw shelf No.15

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1283

Screw shelf No.16

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1284

Screw shelf No.17

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1285

Screw shelf No.18

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1286

Screw shelf No.19

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1287

Screw shelf No.20

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1288

Screw shelf No.21

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1289

Screw shelf No.22

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1290

Screw shelf No.23

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1291

Screw shelf No.24

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1292

Screw shelf No.25

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1293

Screw shelf No.26

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1294

Screw shelf No.27

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1295

Screw shelf No.28

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1296

Screw shelf No.29

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1297

Screw shelf No.30

POKAYOKE terminal address

mismatch

H1301ASLINK configuration update

incorrectly executedSevere

• The SET switch of the AnyWireASLINK

master module was pressed.

• The GOT has recovered from the ASLINK

transmission cable voltage drop error.

Touch the [Register] switch on the "ASLINK

Setting" screen of this system.

H1302AnyWireASLINK master

module errorSevere

• No AnyWireASLINK master module has

been installed.

• The AnyWireASLINK master module has

errors.

• Install an AnyWireASLINK master module.

• Check the installation status of the

AnyWireASLINK master module.

• Replace the AnyWireASLINK master module

with a new one.

H1303Screw shelf setting shortage

errorSevere

The screw shelves required for the assembly

work have not been set on the "ASLINK

Setting" screen.

Set the screw shelves required for the assembly

work on the "ASLINK Setting" screen.

Error

codeError name

Alarm

levelError details and cause Corrective action

6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6 - 19

H1304ASLINK address auto

recognition errorSevere

An error has occurred in the AnyWireASLINK

master module during ASLINK address auto

recognition.

Eliminate the error of the AnyWireASLINK master

module and restart this system.

H1305CPU-GOT communication

errorSevere

Communications cannot be established

between the CPU module and GOT for 60

seconds or longer.

• Check the wiring between the CPU module and

GOT.

• Reset alarms on the "Current Alarms" screen.

M1400Target electric screwdriver

code unregisteredMedium

Electric screwdriver codes required for the

assembly work have not been set in this

system.

• Set the electric screwdrivers required for the

assembly work on the "Electric Screwdriver

Setting" screen.

• Check the details of the assembly manual.

• Check the electric screwdriver codes in the

database.

M1401Target screw code

unregisteredMedium

A screw code required for the assembly work

has not been set in this system.

• Check the details of the assembly manual.

• Check the screw code in the database.

M1402Operator check Server

communication errorMedium

A communication error occurred in the

operator ID inquiry on the "Work Input"

screen.

Eliminate the communication error and retry.

M1403Work step information check

Server communication errorMedium

A communication error occurred in the

assembly work step information inquiry on

the "Work Input" screen.

• Eliminate the communication error and retry.

• Reset alarms on the "Current Alarms" screen.

M1404Screw information check

Server communication errorMedium

A communication error occurred in the screw

information inquiry on the "Work Input"

screen.

• Eliminate the communication error and retry.

• Reset alarms on the "Current Alarms" screen.

M1405

Screw tightening information

check Server communication

error

Medium

A communication error occurred in the screw

tightening information inquiry on the

"Assembly work step" screen.

Reset alarms on the "Current Alarms" screen.

M1407Production results check

Server communication errorMedium

A communication error occurred on the

"Assembly work step" screen in a production

volume inquiry when the production of one

product is completed.

Reset alarms on the "Current Alarms" screen.

M1408Work start information report

Server communication errorMedium

A communication error occurred during the

work start information transmission on the

"Assembly work step" screen.

Reset alarms on the "Current Alarms" screen.

M1410

Screw tightening NG data

information report Server

communication error

Medium

A communication error occurred during the

screw tightening NG data information

transmission on the "Assembly work step"

screen.

Reset alarms on the "Current Alarms" screen.

M1416

Torque check information

report Server communication

error

MediumA communication error occurred during the

torque check information transmission.Reset alarms on the "Current Alarms" screen.

M1418 Item type error MediumAn improper item type has been set in the

assembly work step instructions.

• Pause the assembly work and reset the alarm

in the "Current Alarms" screen.

• Check the details of the assembly manual.

M1430GOT SD memory card

insertion errorMedium

• No SD memory card has been inserted in

the GOT.

• The SD memory card cover is open.

• Insert an SD memory card in the GOT.

• Close the SD memory card cover of the GOT.

Error

codeError name

Alarm

levelError details and cause Corrective action

6 - 20 6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

L1500Screw shelf No.1 door forcibly

opened

MinorThe door of a door-type terminal was forcibly

opened.Close the forcibly opened door.

L1501Screw shelf No.2 door forcibly

opened

L1502Screw shelf No.3 door forcibly

opened

L1503Screw shelf No.4 door forcibly

opened

L1504Screw shelf No.5 door forcibly

opened

L1505Screw shelf No.6 door forcibly

opened

L1506Screw shelf No.7 door forcibly

opened

L1507Screw shelf No.8 door forcibly

opened

L1508Screw shelf No.9 door forcibly

opened

L1509Screw shelf No.10 door

forcibly opened

L1510Screw shelf No.11 door

forcibly opened

L1511Screw shelf No.12 door

forcibly opened

L1512Screw shelf No.13 door

forcibly opened

L1513Screw shelf No.14 door

forcibly opened

L1514Screw shelf No.15 door

forcibly opened

L1515Screw shelf No.16 door

forcibly opened

L1516Screw shelf No.17 door

forcibly opened

L1517Screw shelf No.18 door

forcibly opened

L1518Screw shelf No.19 door

forcibly opened

L1519Screw shelf No.20 door

forcibly opened

L1520Screw shelf No.21 door

forcibly opened

L1521Screw shelf No.22 door

forcibly opened

L1522Screw shelf No.23 door

forcibly opened

L1523Screw shelf No.24 door

forcibly opened

L1524Screw shelf No.25 door

forcibly opened

L1525Screw shelf No.26 door

forcibly opened

L1526Screw shelf No.27 door

forcibly opened

L1527Screw shelf No.28 door

forcibly opened

L1528Screw shelf No.29 door

forcibly opened

L1529Screw shelf No.30 door

forcibly opened

Error

codeError name

Alarm

levelError details and cause Corrective action

6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6 - 21

L1540 Incorrect screw pickup Minor

On the "Assembly work step" screen, screws

were picked up from a screw shelf where the

lamp of the POKAYOKE terminal did not turn

on.

Pick up screws from the screw shelf where the

lamp of the POKAYOKE terminal is on.

L1543No electric screwdriver type

settingMinor

No electric screwdrivers have been

connected or no electric screwdriver types

have been set on the "ASLINK Setting"

screen.

Connect electric screwdrivers and set the types of

the electric screwdrivers on the "ASLINK Setting"

screen.

L1544 No terminal type setting Minor

No terminals have been connected or no

terminal types have been set on the "ASLINK

Setting" screen.

Connect terminals and set the types of the

terminals on the "ASLINK Setting" screen.

L1545No work step information for

the work tableMinor

The data for GOTs in the SD memory card

cannot be read.

• Check the data for GOTs in the SD memory

card.

• Check the structure of files and folders in the

SD memory card.

L1546

Out-of-range address device

ASLINK transmission cable

disconnection error

Minor

A disconnection has occurred in the ASLINK

connected device with the address out of the

range used by this system.

• Check for disconnections of the whole

transmission cables.

• Check the wiring of signal wires of the master

module terminal block.

• After the configuration of electric screwdrivers

is changed, perform the ASLINK address auto

recognition.

• When the ASLINK-compatible electric

screwdriver or the LINK LED of ASLINKER

does not flash, check for the wiring around the

device.

L1550GOT SD memory card

capacity shortageMinor

The remaining capacity of the SD memory

card is less than 1 KB.

Replace the SD memory card with a new one that

has sufficient free capacity.

L1560

Operating mode change

requirement communication

error

Minor

The system received an operation mode

change request while it was unable to accept

requests from the external system.

• Check that assembly work is not being

performed.

• Check that inspections are not being

performed.

• Check that settings are not being configured.

• Check that the free operation is not being

performed.

• Check that the operation mode is not being

switched in the "Work Input" screen.

L1561

Operator ID change

requirement communication

error

Minor

The system received an operator information

change request while it was unable to accept

requests from the external system.

• Check that the operation mode is "Coordinated

operation".

• Check that the production method is "Line

production method 1" or "Line production

method 2".

• Check that assembly work is not being

performed.

• Check that inspections are not being

performed.

• Check that settings are not being configured.

• Check that the free operation is not being

performed.

• Check that the operation mode is not being

switched in the "Work Input" screen.

L1562

Assembly procedure

information change

requirement communication

error

Minor

The system received an assembly

information change request while it was

unable to accept requests from the external

system.

• Check that the operation mode is "Coordinated

operation".

• Check that the production method is "Line

production method 1" or "Line production

method 2".

• Check that assembly work is not being

performed.

• Check that inspections are not being

performed.

• Check that settings are not being configured.

• Check that the free operation is not being

performed.

• Check that the operation mode is not being

switched in the "Work Input" screen.

Error

codeError name

Alarm

levelError details and cause Corrective action

6 - 22 6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6

OP

ER

AT

ION

CH

EC

K

L1563

External additional information

record requirement

communication error

Minor

The system received an external additional

information registration request while it was

unable to accept requests from the external

system.

• Check that the operation mode is "Coordinated

operation".

• Check that the production method is "Line

production method 1" or "Line production

method 2".

• Check that assembly work is not being

performed.

• Check that inspections are not being

performed.

• Check that settings are not being configured.

• Check that the free operation is not being

performed.

• Check that the operation mode is not being

switched in the "Work Input" screen.

L1564Operation starting requirement

communication errorMinor

The system received an assembly work start

request while it was unable to accept

requests from the external system.

• Check that the operation mode is "Coordinated

operation".

• Check that the production method is "Line

production method 1" or "Line production

method 2".

• Check that assembly work is not being

performed.

• Check that inspections are not being

performed.

• Check that settings are not being configured.

• Check that the free operation is not being

performed.

• Check that the operation mode is not being

switched in the "Work Input" screen.

L1565Operation discontinuing

requirement errorMinor

The system received an assembly work

pause request while it was unable to accept

requests from the external system.

• Check that the operation mode is "Coordinated

operation".

• Check that the production method is "Line

production method 1" or "Line production

method 2".

• Check that assembly work is not being

performed.

• Check that inspections are not being

performed.

• Check that settings are not being configured.

• Check that the free operation is not being

performed.

• Check that the operation mode is not being

switched in the "Work Input" screen.

Error

codeError name

Alarm

levelError details and cause Corrective action

6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

6 - 23

6 - 24 6. OPERATION CHECK6.5 Troubleshooting

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION

Users can customize the system of the SCREW TIGHTENING Application by the following methods.

• Creating new sequence programs/screen data and ad

g them to the sequence programs/screen data included in

7

US

ER

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

N

dinthe application

• Changing the screen data for the standard functions according to the user's system configuration

CAUTION

If the SCREW TIGHTENING Application is customized by users, each function of the SCREW TIGHTENING Application may delay or stop its processing.On each user's responsibility, customize the SCREW TIGHTENING Application and its functions and check the operation of them.

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION

7 - 1

7 - 2 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.1 User Program

7.1 User Program

To add user-specific sequence programs in the SCREW TIGHTENING Application, use GX Works2 and add the user programs.

7.1.1 Specifications and restrictions

The following describes the specifications and restrictions on the addition of user programs.

(1) Project

CAUTION

• Except for user devices and devices disclosed to users, do not change values in user programs. Otherwise, it may lead to malfunctions.

• When you use labels in user programs, change the device range in "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" on GX Works2 within the range of the user devices.

• For the other settings, follow the specifications and restrictions below. Otherwise, it may lead to malfunctions.

The following table lists the specifications and re

ictions on projects. str

Item Specifications and restrictions

Project type Structured project (Do not change this setting.)

Label Use (Do not change this setting.)

PLC series LCPU (Do not change this setting.)

PLC type

Select one of the following.

• L02CPU

• L02CPU-P

• L06CPU

• L06CPU-P

• L26CPU

• L26CPU-P

• L26CPU-BT

• L26CPU-PBT

(2) Parameter

The following table lists the specifications and re

ictions on the parameters. str

(a) PLC parameter

Parameter name Item Specifications and restrictions

PLC System

Timer Limit Setting Do not change this setting.

Common Pointer Do not change this setting.

Interrupt Program/Fixed

Scan Program Setting

When selecting "High speed execution", do not use the index (Z) in interrupt programs/

fixed scan programs.

PLC File File Register Do not change this setting.

PLC RAS Constant Scanning Do not change this setting.

Boot File - Do not change this setting.

7

SE

R C

US

TO

MIZ

AT

ION

Program

Program Name

• SCREW TIGHTENING Application program: KEY_ST (Do not change this setting.)

• SCREW TIGHTENING Application program: KEY_LD (Do not change this setting.)

• SCREW TIGHTENING Application program: SCR002AA (Do not change this

setting.)

• User program: USRPRG01 (Do not change this setting.)

(Programs can be added until the number of programs reaches the number that GX

Works2 allows besides these programs.)

Execute Type

• KEY_ST: Initial (Do not change this setting.)

• KEY_LD: Initial (Do not change this setting.)

• SCR002AA: Scan (Do not change this setting.)

• USRPRG01: Scan (Do not change this setting.)

(Any execution type can be selected for added programs other than above.)

Executing order

• KEY_ST: 1 (Do not change this setting.)

• KEY_LD: 2 (Do not change this setting.)

• SCR002AA: 3 (Do not change this setting.)

• USRPRG01: 4 (Do not change this setting.)

(Any execution order (≥ 5) can be selected for added programs other than the above.)

SFC - Do not change this setting.

Device

Device PointsDo not change this setting.

For user devices, refer to "(3)Device".

Local Device Do not use local devices.

Latch

Include the following range in "Latch (2)".

• Latch Relay (L): 0 to 1999

• File Register (ZR): 0 to 119999

Index (Z)

This SCREW TIGHTENING Application also uses the index.

When using the index (Z) in an interrupt program or a fixed scan program, execute the

saving/restoration processing in the user program.

I/O Assignment

I/O Assignment

Do not change the setting values of the following modules.

• CPU (Built-in I/O function): 0000

• LJ51AW12AL: 0010

• LY40NT5P: 0030

Switch Setting

Do not change the setting values of the following modules.

• CPU (Built-in I/O function)

• LJ51AW12AL

• LY40NT5P

Built-in Ethernet

Port Setting-

Do not change any settings other than below.

• IP Address Setting

Built-in I/O

Function Setting

Input Signal

Do not change any settings other than below.

• Xn0 to Xn5

• Xn7 to XnF

Output SignalDo not change any settings other than below.

• Yn7

Parameter name Item Specifications and restrictions

U

(b) Network parameter

No restrictions are applied.

(c) Remote passwordDo not change the setting values of the following modules.• CPU (Built-in I/O function)

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.1 User Program

7 - 3

7 - 4 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.1 User Program

(3) Device

(a) User device

The following table lists the ranges of the de

es that users can freely use at the user customization of this vicsystem.

Device name BaseNo. of

pointsUser device Device name Base

No. of

pointsUser device

Input relay X 16 8K

X0 to X5, X7 to X0F,

X40 to X0FFF,

X1200 to X1FFF

Retentive timer ST 10 0K -

Output relay Y 16 8KY7, Y40 to Y0FFF,

Y1200 to Y1FFFCounter C 10 1K C500 to C1023

Internal relay M 10 12K M9000 to M12287 Data register D 10 12K D9000 to D12287

Latch relay L 10 8K L2000 to L8191 Link register W 16 8K W1000 to W1FFF

Link relay B 16 8K B1000 to B1FFF Link special register SW 16 2K -

Annunciator F 10 2K F1024 to F2047 Index Z 10 20 Z0 to 19

Link special relay SB 16 2K - File register ZR 10 64K ZR30000 to ZR65535

Edge relay V 10 2K V1024 to V2047Extended data

registerD 10 0K -

Step relay S 10 8K S2000 to S8191Extended link

registerW 16 0K -

Timer T 10 2K T500 to T2047 Pointer P 10 4K P200 to P4095

(b) Devices disclosed to usersAmong the devices occupied by this system, the applications of some devices are disclosed to users.Users can access the devices disclosed to users from user programs and refer to information of the system and perform some operations on this system.For the list of devices disclosed to users, refer to the following.

Appendix.4 Devices Disclosed to Users

(4) Device comments, statements, and notes

No restrictions are applied.

(5) Device/label automatic-assign settingWhen you use labels in user programs, change the device range in "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" on GX Works2 within the range of the user devices. The following figure shows a setting example.

7

(6) Others

LA1S extension base units (LA1S65B, LA1S68B

nd LA1S51B) cannot be used.

US

ER

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

N

, a

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.1 User Program

7 - 5

7 - 6 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.1 User Program

7.1.2 Adding a user program

The following describes the procedure for adding a user program.

(1) Preparing a GX Works2 project

5.2.1 Preparing a GX Works2 project

(2) Reading a project

5.2.2 Reading a project

(3) Adding a user program

Add a user program to the SCREW TIGHTENIN

Application. G

1. In the SCREW TIGHTENING Application project, you can find "USRPRG01", a user program.

2. Add a sequence program to the existing program "USRPRG01" or create program data for the user program.

CAUTION

• "SCR002AA" in POU is the system programs of the SCREW TIGHTENING Application. Users cannot browse or edit them.

• "USRPRG01" contains the sample program for the torque check function. Delete this program when it is not used.

• The following shows the number of available steps in the user program.• L02CPU/L02CPU-P: 5K steps• L06CPU/L06CPU-P: 45K steps• L26CPU/L26CPU-P/L26CPU-BT/L26CPU-PBT: 245K steps

(4) Writing the project

5.2.6 Writing the project

7.2 User Screen

To add user-specific screens to the SCREW TIGHTENING Application, use GT Designer3 and add the screens.

7.2.1 Specifications and restrictions

The following describes the specifications and restrictions on the addition of user screens.

(1) System

CAUTION

• Except for user devices, do not change values in user programs. Otherwise, it may lead to malfunctions.

• For the other settings, follow the specifications and restrictions below. Otherwise, it may lead to malfunctions.

The following table lists the specifications and re

ictions on the system.

7

MIZ

AT

ION

str

Item Specifications and restrictions

GOT setting Environmental Setting

Do not change any settings other than "startup logo".

(Do not change the settings of overlap window 4 and 5

that can be used in user screens.)

Controller setting

CH1

Set "Detail Setting" and "Ethernet Setting" according to

the network environment used.

(Do not change any settings other than the above.)

Network/duplication settingDo not change this setting.

Use the buffer memory module No. switching

Peripheral device setting Barcode ReaderStandard I/F (RS232)

(Do not change this setting.)

Interface connection list

Standard I/F setting I/F-3

Do not change this setting.Standard I/F setting I/F-4

RS232 setting

TO

(2) Project

The following table lists the user areas related to

rojects.

US

ER

CU

S

p

Item User area

ScreenBase screen 0 to 29999

Window screen 0 to 29999

Comment Comment group No. 0 to 399

Alarm

Alarm ID 0 to 29999

Alarm Common Setting

Do not change this setting.System Alarm Observation

Alarm Popup Display

(3) Device

The following table lists the user devices.

Device name User device

GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB24999

GOT word register (GD) GD0 to GD24999

(4) Security

Settings other than below cannot be configured.

• Adding users at the Developer1 or lower level

s• Changing passwords for users at the Developer1 or lower levels

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

7 - 7

7 - 8 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

7.2.2 Adding a user screen

The following describes the procedure for adding a user screen.

(1) Preparing a GT Designer3 project

5.4.1 Preparing a GT Designer3 project

(2) Reading a project

5.4.2 Reading a project

(3) Adding a user screen

Add a user screen to the SCREW TIGHTENING

pplication.

7

US

ER

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

N

ASelect where to add the screen from one of the positions shown with red frames in the figure below.

Electric Screwdriver Setting

RUN State Indicator Setting

Home Work Input

Verify Screw Box

Electric Screwdriver Inspection

Work Table Setting

Current Alarms

Alarm History

System Alarm

Free Operation

Backup/Restoration

Assembly work step

Tightening time correction

Screw Shelf Inspection

Other Devices Inspection

ASLINK Setting

System setting

Language Setting

Operator Check

Clock Setting

Work Input

Inspection

Screen

Switch in the home screen/main menu

Torque Check

Explanatory note

Free Operation

User Screen

Verify Screw Box

Setting

Alarm

Torque Check Sample screen

User customizationmain screen 1

User customizationmain screen 2

UserHome screen

SCREW TIGHTENINGHome screen

User customizationfree-use screen 1

User customizationfree-use screen 2

User customizationfree-use screen 3

::

7.3 Torque Check

(Sample)

7. USER CUSTOMIZ7.2 User

ATIONScreen

7 - 9

7 - 10 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

(a) User customization main screenThis screen is switched from the SCREW TIGHTENING home screen or main menu.

This screen consists of a user customization main screen (B-30700 or B-30800*1) and a user-edited base

screen (B-90 or B-100*1).

*1 Available only when the GT2715-XTBA is used.

Follow the steps below to set switches used to switch a screen to the user customization main screen and create user-edited base screens.

B-30800B-30700

B-100(Called from B-30800)

B-90(Called from

B-30700)

1. Double-click the switch (for B-30700 or B-30800) on the base screen (B-30000: Home) to open the setting dialog box.

2. Change "Trigger Type" to "Ordinary" in the "Trigger" tab.

3. Open the comment list of the comment group No. 400 and change the comments of the following comment numbers to the text to be displayed on the switch in the base screen (B-30000: Home).

• Comment No. 8: For B-30700• Comment No. 9: For B-30800

For B-30800

For B-30700

7

US

ER

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

N

4. Double-click the switch (for B-30700 or B-30800) on the base screen (B-30051: Footer) to open the setting dialog box.

5. Change "ON/OFF" of the device "GB40" in the "Trigger" tab to "ON".

6. Open the comment list of the comment group No. 400 and change the comments of the following comment numbers to the text to be displayed on the switch in the base screen (B-30051: Footer).

• Comment No. 114: For B-30700• Comment No. 116: For B-30800

7. Change the comments of the following comment numbers to the text to be displayed as the title in the user-edited base screen (B-90 or B-100).

• Comment No. 113: For B-90• Comment No. 115: For B-100

For B-30800

For B-30700

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

7 - 11

POINTPOINTPOINT

User customization main screen

• Refer to the following for the specifications and restrictions on the creation of this screen.

7.2.1 Specifications and restrictions• The following shows the editable areas (X, Y) in the user-edited base screen (B-90 or B-100).

B-90: (0, 0) to (1024, 646)B-100: (0, 0) to (800, 494)

8. Double-click the user-edited base screen (B-90 or B-100) to open the editor screen.

9. Edit the user-edited base screen.

7 - 12 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

(b) User customization free-use screenThis screen can be switched from the user home screen.Follow the steps below to create a user customization free-use screen and add a switch used to switch the screen to the user home screen.

7

US

TO

MIZ

AT

ION

1. Create a new base screen (Ex. B-10: User customize 01) for the user customization free-use screen.

2. Add a switch used to switch the screen to the base screen (B-1: User home screen) on the created user customization free-use screen.

• Base screen (B-30050: Header01) 3. Add a header on the created user customization free-use screen.

The following three types of headers are available.For the functions and how to add each of the headers, refer to the following.

• Base screen (B-30054: Header03)

• Base screen (B-1: User home screen)

C

U

SE

R

Screen No./screen name Login status Current alarms How to add

Base screen (B-30050: Header01) Displayed DisplayedCall the base screen (B-30050: Header01) from the user

customization free-use screen.

Base screen (B-30054: Header03) Displayed Not displayedCall the base screen (B-30054: Header03) from the user

customization free-use screen.

Base screen (B-1: User home screen) Displayed Not displayedCopy the base screen (B-1: User home screen) and

paste it in the user customization free-use screen.

4. To display a title in the base screens (B-30050: Header01) and (B-30054: Header03), add a "Comment Display (Simple Comment)" object.

For the coordinates and size of the object to be added, refer to the following.

GOT Upper left coordinates (X, Y) Size (width, height)

GT2715-XTBA (128,12) (737, 25)

GT2512-STBA (128, 8) (545, 25)

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

7 - 13

7 - 14 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

POINTPOINTPOINT

For user customization free-use screen

• Refer to the following for the specifications and restrictions on the creation of this screen.

7.2.1 Specifications and restrictions

5. Double-click the added "Comment Display (Simple Comment)" object and open the setting dialog box.

6. Change "Comment Group No." and "Comment No." to the ones for the comment to be displayed as a title.

7. Change the settings of "Size/Alignment" as shown on the left.

(c) User home screenThis screen is the home screen for the user customization free-use screens and can be switched from the SCREW TIGHTENING home screen.Follow the steps below to set a switch used to switch the screen to the created user customization free-use screen.

1. Double-click the switch (for B-10: User customize 01) on the base screen (B-1: User home screen) to open the setting dialog box.

2. Change "Trigger Type" to "Ordinary" in the "Trigger" tab.

B-10: For User customize 01

7

US

ER

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

N

POINTPOINTPOINT

User home screen

• Do not give functions other than the function that switches a screen to the SCREW TIGHTENING home screen and user customization free-use screens to this screen. However, when you create only one user customization free-use screen, this screen can be used as the user customization free-use screen.

• Although you can change the position, size, and style of the switches in this screen, do not delete the [SCREW TIGHTENING] switch.

(4) Adding commentsTo add comments, create a new comment group and set the following in the property.

3. Change "Group No." and "Comment No." in the "Text" tab to the ones for the comment to be displayed on the switch.

CAUTIONThe following shows available memory capacity for user screens:

• GT2715-XTBA: ROM 47 MB, RAM 98 MB• GT2512-STBA: ROM 22 MB, RAM 50 MB

Item Settings

Group No. Within the range of user areas ( (2)Project)

KANJI Region

Column 1 Japan

Column 2 Japan

Column 3 China(GB)-Mincho

Prioritize comment group setting over the language

switch setting in GOT Environmental SettingNot selected

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

7 - 15

7 - 16 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

(5) Adding alarms

The following describes the procedure for addin

larms. g a

(a) Adding alarms in the existing user alarm observation settingAdd alarm messages in the existing comment group "499 SCR_Alarm message" and set the following items.

Increase the number of alarms by the number of alarms added in the existing user alarm observation setting "30000 SCR_Alarm" and set the following items.

Item Settings

Comment No. 500 to 999

Comment

Column 1 Alarm messages in Japanese

Column 2 Alarm messages in English

Column 3 Alarm messages in Chinese (Simplified)

Attributes

Text Black

Invert No

Blink None

Style Regular

Solid No set

High Quality Font

12dot Gothic

Not selected12dot Mincho

16dot Gothic

16dot Mincho

Item Settings

Device Optional

Alarm Range ON

Basic Alarm Comment No. Comment No. of the added alarm message

Upper Comment No.

Major alarm 300

Medium alarm 200

Minor alarm 100

ResetYES

0

Level

Major alarm 3

Medium alarm 2

Minor alarm 1

Group 1

(b) Creating a new user alarm observation settingCreate a new comment group and user alarm observation setting for the added alarms within the range of

the user areas ( (2)Project).

(6) Specifying users who can switch the screensWhen the following settings are applied, the user customization main screen and user customization free-use screens can limit users who can switch the screens.

7

N

1. Right-click the base screen to limit users and select [Screen Property] from the menu.The "Screen Property" dialog box appears.

2. Change the value of "Security" in the "Basic" tab according to the table below.

US

ER

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

Value of "Security" Transition condition

Screen transition in each login status (: Switchable, : Not switchable)

Non-login status Operator Local manager Manager

0 Not limit

1Operator or higher

level

2Local manager or

higher level

3 Only manager

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

7 - 17

7 - 18 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.2 User Screen

(7) Customizing the Other Devices Inspection screenYou can delete the inspection items for unused devices and change the position of the items by the following procedure.

1. Delete the unnecessary inspection items from the base screen (B-5: Customize inspection) displaying the preview of the base screen (B-30320: Other devices inspection).

• Preview of the base screen (B-30320: Other devices inspection)

Base screen (B-5: Customize inspection) •

(e)

(d)

(c)

(b)

(a)

(e)

(d)

(c)

(b)

(a)

(a) Indicator for screw tightening check

(b) RUN state indicator

(c) Buzzer

(d) Barcode reader

(e) External input

2. Modify the layout of the objects in the base screen (B-5: Customize inspection) and adjust the screen layout.

(8) Writing the project

5.4.7 Writing the project

7.3 Torque Check (Sample)

The following describes how to use the sample program and sample screen used to add the torque check function using a torque checker in this system.

POINTPOINTPOINT

The sample program and sample screen are created under the following specifications.

• A torque checker in the serial connection is use

d.• The serial communication module (LJ71C24-R2) is added in the programmable controller system.• The torque checker is connected to the channel 1 of the serial communication module (LJ71C24-R2).• Touching the [Torque Check] switch in the sub menu [Inspection] switches the screen to the "Torque Check"

screen.• The torque check function operates only when the "Torque Check" screen is displayed.

(1) Adding the serial communication module (on GX Works2)

Configure the following settings on GX Works2.

7

US

ER

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

N

1. Right-click "Intelligent Function Module" under "Project" in the Navigation window, and select [New Module] from the menu.

2. The "New Module" dialog box appears.

3. Enter or select the following items.• Module Type: "Serial Communication

Module"• Module Name: "LJ71C24-R2"• Mounted Slot No.: "2"• Specify start XY address: Selected,

"0040"

4. Click the [OK] button.

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.3 Torque Check (Sample)

7 - 19

5. "0040: LJ71C24-R2" is added under "Intelligent Function Module" of "Project" in the Navigation window.

6. Double-click "Switch Setting" under "0040: LJ71C24-R2".

7. The "Switch Setting 0040: LJ71C24-R2" dialog box appears.

8. Change the following items for CH1.• Data Bit: "8"• Communication rate setting: "2400bps"• Communication protocol setting:

"Nonprocedural protocol"(Do not change any settings other than the above.)

9. Click the [OK] button.

10.Double-click "Various_Control_Specification" of "0040: LJ71C24-R2".

7 - 20 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.3 Torque Check (Sample)

(2) Modifying the sample program (on GX Works2)

11.The "0040: LJ71C24-R2[]-Various_Control_Specification" window appears.

12.Change the following items for CH1.• For designation of communication

control-Word/byte units designation: "1: Byte Unit"

• For data reception-Receive complete code designation: "13(Dh)"

(Do not change any settings other than the above.)

The user program "USRPRG01" contains the sa

le program for the torque check function.

7

mp

Modify the sample program on GX Works2 as needed.

(3) Modifying the sample screen (on GT Designer3)

N

Set sub menus and modify the sample screen o T Designer3.

TIO

n G

The sample torque check screen consists of the base screen (B-30330) and the user editing base screen (B-4).

A

U

SE

R C

US

TO

MIZ

Follow the steps below to set the switch used to switch a screen to the Torque Check screen in the Inspection sub menu and modify the user-edited base screen (B-4).

B-30330

B-4(Called from B-30330)

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.3 Torque Check (Sample)

7 - 21

7 - 22 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.3 Torque Check (Sample)

1. Double-click the switch (for B-30330) on the base screen (B-30063: Sub menu3) to open the setting dialog box.

2. Change "ON/OFF" of the device "GB40" in the "Trigger" tab to "ON".

3. Change "Comment No." to "248" in the "Text" tab.

(Change the above setting for "Lamp OFF", "Lamp ON", and "When switch does not work".)

4. Double-click the user-edited base screen (B-4) to open the editor screen.

5. Modify the screen as needed.

For B-30330

7

US

ER

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

N

(4) How to use the torque check (sample) function

1. Touch [Inspection] in the main menu and [Torque Check] in the sub menu.

2. The following screen appears.

3. Touch the [Enable] switch of "Torque check mode".

4. Touch [Electric screwdriver No.] switches to select check target electric screwdrivers.

POINTPOINTPOINT

Power will be supplied to the electric screwdrivers selected as check targets and the [Supply power] lamps will turn on.

5. Use the electric screwdrivers and torque checker to measure torque values.

6. Torque values are displayed in the "Torque check value" column and torque check results will be sent to the database server.When all the torque check results of the electric screwdrivers selected as check targets have been sent, the [Torque check information report sent] lamp will turn on.

7. To end the check, touch the [Disable] switch of "Torque check mode".

CAUTIONThis function is provided as a sample.When applying this function on user's systems, customize the SCREW TIGHTENING Application and its functions and check the operation of them on each user's responsibility.

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.3 Torque Check (Sample)

7 - 23

7 - 24 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.4 Externally Connected Electric Screwdriver

7.4 Externally Connected Electric Screwdriver

Externally connected electric screwdrivers connected by the methods other than the ASLINK connection determine the acceptance of screw tightening and input the results in this system.

To use the externally connected electric screwdrivers, follow the specifications below and create a user program.

(1) Externally connected electric screwdriver settingSwitch whether to use externally connected electric screwdrivers by changing the setting value of ZR232.(When this setting is not changed in the user program, Not used ("0") is set.)

• "0": Not used

• "1": Used

POINTPOINTPOINT

ZR232 is referred to only in one scan after the programmable controller enters the RUN state. When this setting is changed in the user program, restart the CPU module.

(2) Interface with externally connected electric screwdrivers

POINTPOINTPOINT

(1) When an electric screwdriver that can detect reverse signals is connected as an externally connected electric screwdriverThis system receives "Electric screwdriver OK signal" and "Electric screwdriver NG signal".When a reverse signal is detected during screw tightening, turn on "Electric screwdriver NG signal".

(2) When an externally connected electric screwdriver is connected and used as multiple electric screwdrivers in the assembly work step instruction(When a controller of the electric screwdriver has a program function and torque values can be switched with the program numbers)Refer to the electric screwdriver No. (electric screwdriver code) according to the ON timing of the electric screwdriver operable signal and create a user program to set program numbers in the controller of the target electric screwdriver.

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1Electric screwdriver

operable signalOUT BIT M8680

This signal turns on when an electric screwdriver is

specified as the electric screwdriver used for the item in the

assembly work step instruction.

2 Electric screwdriver No. OUT WORD D8269The electric screwdriver No. specified in the assembly work

step instruction is set.

3 Electric screwdriver code OUT WORD D8262The electric screwdriver code specified in the assembly

work step instruction is set.

4Electric screwdriver OK

signalIN BIT M8681 This signal turns on when the screw tightening result is OK.

5Electric screwdriver NG

signalIN BIT M8682 This signal turns on when the screw tightening result is NG.

6

Electric screwdriver

operable signal in the free

operation mode

OUT BIT M8683This signal turns on when the electric screwdriver is ready

to operate in the free operation mode.

7.4

7

US

ER

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

N

(3) Timing chart of when screw tightening is OK

*1 If a ready signal (operable signal) is required for the externally connected electric screwdriver (controller) used, turn on/off the

signal at the above timing.

(4) Timing chart of when screw tightening is NG

*1 If a ready signal (operable signal) is required for the externally connected electric screwdriver (controller) used, turn on/off the

signal at the above timing.

(5) Timing chart in the free operation mode

*1 If a ready signal (operable signal) is required for the externally connected electric screwdriver (controller) used, turn on/off the

signal at the above timing.

Application setting

Application setting

Application setting Electric screwdriver operable signal

Application setting Electric screwdriver No.

Application setting Electric screwdriver code

Externally connected electric screwdriver setting (Electric screwdriver ready signal)*1

Externally connected electric screwdriver setting Electric screwdriver OK signal

Externally connected electric screwdriver setting Electric screwdriver NG signal

Electric screwdriver OK signal

Electric screwdriver NG signal

Application setting Electric screwdriver operable signal

Application setting Electric screwdriver No.

Application setting

Application setting

Application setting

Electric screwdriver code

Externally connected electric screwdriver setting (Electric screwdriver ready signal)*1

Externally connected electric screwdriver setting Electric screwdriver OK signal

Externally connected electric screwdriver setting Electric screwdriver NG signal

Electric screwdriver OK signal

Electric screwdriver NG signal

Externally connected electric screwdriver setting (Electric screwdriver ready signal)*1

Application setting Electric screwdriver operable signal

Application setting

Externally connected electric screwdriver setting Electric screwdriver OK signal

Externally connected electric screwdriver setting Electric screwdriver NG signal

Electric screwdriver operable signal in the free operation mode

7. USER CUSTOMIZATION Externally Connected Electric Screwdriver

7 - 25

7 - 26 7. USER CUSTOMIZATION7.5 Coordinated Production with External Devi

7.5 Coordinated Production with External Devices Function

The SCREW TIGHTENING Application has external interfaces that are used for the operation coordinated with the external system devices.When external interfaces are used, this application can be controlled from the external system without using the Work Input screen.

To use the external interfaces, follow the specifications below and create a user program.

(1) Production method

This system has multiple production methods. T

specifications and operations of interfaces depend on the heproduction method used.The production method can be switched by changing the setting value of ZR230.(When this setting is not changed in the user program, Cell production method ("0") is set.)

*1 When no order numbers are registered, work record is not recorded.

POINTPOINTPOINT

ZR230 is referred to only in one scan after the programmable controller enters the RUN state. When a customized program is written, restart the CPU module.

(2) Interface specificationsFor the details of the interfaces, refer to the following.

Appendix.5 External Interface

Production

method

Setting

value of

ZR230

Description

Start

notification

method

ID

generation

Registration of

order numbers to

the database

Work No.

Cell production

method0

In this method, the Work Input screen is used instead of

external interfaces. (External interfaces can be used to

notify the work status.)

Work Input

screenApplication Required Available

Line production

method 11

In this method, this application receives order numbers

from external interfaces and performs assembly work by

the number of parts registered in each order number.

(Use this method to manage production plans with this

application.)

Order No. Application Required Available

Line production

method 22

In this method, this application receives control numbers

from external interfaces and performs assembly work

registered in each control number for one product.

(Use this method to manage production plans with the

external system.)

Control No.External

systemOption*1 Unavailable

ces Function

A

EN

DIC

ES

APPENDICES

Appendix.1 Specifications of the Programmable Controller

Appendix.1.1 General specifications

PP

A

*1 Do not use or store the programmable controller under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m. Doing so

may cause malfunction. When using the programmable controller under pressure, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric

representative.

*2 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical

power distribution network and the machinery within premises.

Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for

up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V.

*3 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is

used.

Pollution level 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected

occasionally.

Item Specifications

Operating ambient

temperature0 to 55°C

Storage ambient

temperature-25 to 75°C

Operating ambient

humidity5 to 95% RH, non-condensing

Storage ambient

humidity

Vibration resistance

Compliant with JIS

B 3502 and IEC

61131-2

FrequencyConstant

accelerationHalf amplitude Sweep count

Under

intermittent

vibration

5 to 8.4 Hz - 3.5 mm10 times each in X,

Y, and Z directions8.4 to 150 Hz 9.8 m/s2 -

Under

continuous

vibration

5 to 8.4 Hz - 1.75 mm

-8.4 to 150 Hz 4.9 m/s2 -

Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions)

Operating

atmosphereNo corrosive gases

Operating altitude*1 0 to 2000 m

Installation location Inside a control panel

Overvoltage

category*2II or less

Pollution degree*3 2 or less

Equipment class Class I

App - 1

App - 2

Appendix.1.2 Specification of the CPU module

The following shows the specifications of the CPU module using the L06CPU as an example.

Part names

Battery holder(bottom surface)

13)

15)

5)

8)

9)

6)

7)

11) 10) 3) 2) 4) 17) 12) 14) 16)

18)

1)

No. Name Description

1)

MODE LED

- Indicates the mode of the CPU module. *1

On (green) Normal operation mode

Flashing (green)Forced mode (Flashes when the forced on/off function for external I/O or the executional conditioned

device test function is active.*1)

RUN LED

- Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.

On (green) Operating normally

Flashing (green)Write to PLC is executed when the CPU module is in the STOP state, and the module is switched to RUN

without resetting.

Off Stopped, or a stop error is detected.

BAT. LED

- Indicates the battery status or latch data backup status of the CPU module. *1

On (green) Restoration of latch data backup to the standard ROM is completed (5 seconds).

Flashing (green) Latch data backup to the standard ROM is completed.

Flashing (yellow) A battery error occurs.

Off Operating normally

ERR. LED

- Indicates the error detection status of the CPU module.

On (red) A continuation error is detected.

Flashing (red) A stop error is detected, or the CPU module is reset.

Off Operating normally

I/O ERR. LED

- Indicates the error detection status of the built-in I/O function.

On (red) An error occurs in the built-in I/O function.

Off Operating normally

USER LED

- Indicates the status of the annunciator (F). *1

On (red) The annunciator (F) is on.

Off The CPU module is operating normally or the annunciator (F) is inactive.

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

*1 For details on LED when using each function, refer to description of the function in the following manual.

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)

2) 100M LED

- Indicates the data transmission speed over Ethernet.

On (green) Communicates at 100 Mbps.

Off Communicates at 10 Mbps, or no connection is established.

3) SD/RD LED

- Indicates the data send/receive status over Ethernet.

On (green) Data is being sent or being received.

Off No data is sent or received.

4)

IN 0 to IN F LED

- Indicates the input status.

On (green) The input signal is on.

Off The input signal is off.

OUT 0 to OUT 7 LED

- Indicates the output status.

On (green) The output signal is on.

Off The output signal is off.

5) SD LED

- Indicates the status of an SD memory card. (Also used in the data logging function.*1)

On (green) An SD memory card is being used.

Flashing (green) An SD memory card is being prepared.

Off No SD memory card is used.

6)RUN/STOP/RESET

switch

- A switch to control the operating status of the CPU module

RUN Indicates the operation execution of a program.

STOP Indicates the operation stop of a program.

RESETIndicates that the CPU module is reset. Refer to the following.

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

7) SD memory card lock switch A switch to stop card access while an SD memory card is being inserted or removed

8) SD memory card slot A slot where an SD memory card is inserted

9) USB connector A connector to connect to USB-compatible peripherals (Connector type: miniB)

10) Built-in Ethernet portA connector to connect to Ethernet devices. (RJ45 connector) Use a twisted pair cable for Ethernet to

connect an Ethernet device.

11) Serial number display Indicates the serial number printed on the rating plate.

12) Module joint lever A hook to fix a module joint

13) Display unit hook A hook to fix a display unit to the CPU module

14) Battery connector pinA pin to connect a lead wire of the battery (To save the battery, the lead wire is removed from the

connector before shipment.)

15) Display unit dummy cover A dummy cover used when no display unit is connected

16) Battery A battery for backup when using the standard RAM or the backup power function

17) Connectors for external devices (40 pins) A connector to connect I/O signal wires to/from external devices

18) DIN rail hook A hook used to mount the module to a DIN rail

No. Name Description

App - 3

App - 4

External dimension diagrams

70954

94

0

45(4

5)

4

DIN rail center

(Unit: mm)

Hardware specifications

Item Specifications

Control method Stored program repeat operation

I/O control modeRefresh mode (The direct access input/output is available by specifying the direct

access input/output (DX, DY).)

Programming language (sequence control language)Function block, relay symbol language, MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L,

structured text (ST), logic symbolic language

Processing speed

(sequence instruction)

LD X0 9.5ns

MOV D0 D1 19ns

Constant scan 0.5 to 2000 ms (Setting is available in increments of 0.5 ms by parameter.)

Program size 60K steps (240K bytes)

Memory capacity

Program memory (drive 0) 240K bytes

Memory card (RAM) (drive 1) -

Memory card (ROM) (drive 2) Capacity of the inserted SD memory card (SD/SDHC)

Standard RAM (drive 3) 768K bytes

Standard ROM (drive 4) 1024K bytes

Number of storable files

Program memory 124 files

Memory card (RAM) -

Memory card

(ROM)

SD Root directory: 511 files (maximum), Subdirectory: 65533 files (maximum)

SDHC Root directory: 65534 files (maximum), Subdirectory: 65533 files (maximum)

Standard RAM4 files (each one of the following files: file register file, local device file,

sampling trace file, and module error collection file)

Standard ROM 256 files

Maximum number of intelligent function

module parameters

Initial setting 4096 parameters

Refresh 2048 parameters

Number of writes to program memory 100000 times (maximum)

Number of writes to standard ROM 100000 times (maximum)

Built-in I/O function Specifications of the external I/O interface

Built-in Ethernet functionRefer to the following.

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Clock function

Displayed informationYear, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week

(automatic leap year adjustment)

Accuracy

0°C: -2.96 to +3.74s (TYP. +1.42s) per day

25°C: -3.18 to +3.74s (TYP. +1.50s) per day

55°C: -13.20 to +2.12s (TYP. -3.54s) per day

Allowable momentary power failure time Depends on the power supply module used.

Internal current

consumption (5 V DC)

With display unit 1.06 A

Without display unit 1.00 A

External dimensions

H 90 mm

W 70 mm

D 95 mm

Weight 0.37 kg

Item Specifications

Specifications of the external I/O interface

(1) Input specifications

The following shows a temperature derating curve for the input signal.

Item Specifications

Signal nameHigh-speed input (IN0 to IN5) Standard input (IN6 to INF)

24 V input Differential input 24 V input

Rated input voltage24 V DC (+20%/-15%, ripple ratio

within 5%)

EIA Standard RS-422-A Differential

line driver level (AM26L31

(Manufactured by Texas Instruments

Incorporated) or equivalent)

24 V DC (+20%/-15%, ripple ratio

within 5%)

Rated input current 6.0 mA (TYP.) (at 24 V DC) 4.1 mA (TYP.) (at 24 V DC)

ON voltage/ON current 19.0 V or higher/5.0 mA or higher 19.0 V or higher/3.5 mA or higher

OFF voltage/OFF

current8 V or lower/1.5 mA or lower 8 V or lower/1.0 mA or lower

Input resistance 3.8 kΩ 5.6 kΩ

Response

time

On 10 µs or less 100 µs or less

Off 10 µs or less 100 µs or less

Withstand voltage 510 V AC for 1 minute between input terminal and internal power supply (altitude: 0 to 2000 m)

Insulation resistance 10 MΩ or higher between input terminals and internal power supply (500 V DC insulation resistance tester)

Wiring method for

commonIndependent common - 10 points/common

60

4

0 10 20 30 40 50

10

16

55

14

6

12

8

Ambient temperature (°C)

Input voltage: 24 V DC

Input voltage: 28.8 V DC

(16 points, 55°C)

(8 points, 55°C)

(16 points, 45°C)

2

0

Input voltage: 26.4 V DC

Sim

ulta

neou

s on

poi

nts

(poi

nt)

App - 5

App - 6

(2) Output specifications

Item Specifications

Signal name Output (OUT0 to OUT7)

Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC

Rated load current 0.1 A/point

Maximum voltage

drop at ON0.2 V (TYP.)

Leakage current at

OFF0.1 mA or lower

Response

time

On 1 µs or less (rated load, resistive load)

Off 1 µs or less (rated load, resistive load)

Withstand voltage 510 V AC for 1 minute between output terminal and internal power supply (altitude: 0 to 2000 m)

Insulation resistance 10 MΩ or higher between output terminals and internal power supply (500 V DC insulation resistance tester)

Wiring method for

common8 points/common (Sink type)

A

PE

ND

ICE

S

Appendix.1.3 Battery replacement procedure

Data in the memory is backed up for a while by a capacitor even after the battery is removed from the CPU module.However, replace the battery quickly because the data may be erased after the backup power time (three minutes) is elapsed.

(1) Pre-procedurePerform the following before replacing the battery.• Back up the program and data.• Supply power to the CPU module for 10 minutes or longer.

(2) Replacement procedure

1. Remove a CPU module from the DIN rail and

AP

open the battery holder located at the bottom of the CPU module.

2. Take out the battery from the battery holder. (The battery connector is disconnected at shipment.)

3. Connect the lead connector of the new battery to that of the CPU module. Then, store them in the battery holder. Fix the connectors to the connector stopper of the holder.

4. Close the battery holder and mount the CPU module to the DIN rail.

Connector ofbattery

Connector ofCPU module

Connector

Connector stopper

App - 7

App - 8

Appendix.1.4 Specifications of the power supply module

The following shows the specifications of the power supply module using the L61P as an example.

Part names1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

No. Name Description

1) POWER LED

Indicates the power supply status.

On (green): The module is operating normally.

Off: Power is not supplied, power has failed, or the hardware has failed.

2) FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed-circuit board (M3.5)

3) LG terminalGround terminal for the power supply filter. For AC input, it has one-half the potential of the input voltage.

(M3.5)

4) Power input terminals

Input terminals for power (M3.5)

For the power supply to be connected, refer to the following.

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

5) Serial number display Displays the serial number printed on the rating plate.

6) DIN rail hook A hook used to mount the module to a DIN rail

External dimension diagrams

4510995

4

94

0

45(4

5)

(Unit: mm)

DIN rail center

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Specification list

Item Specifications

Input power supply 100 to 240 V AC (-15% to +10%)

Input frequency 50/60 Hz (-5% to +5%)

Input voltage distortion Within 5%

Maximum input apparent power 130 VA

Maximum input power -

Inrush current 20 A, within 8 ms

Rated output current (5 V DC) 5 A

External output voltage -

Overcurrent protection (5 V DC) 5.5 A or more

Overvoltage protection 5.5 to 6.5 V

Efficiency 70% or more

Allowable momentary power failure time Within 10 ms

Withstand voltage2300 V AC per minute (altitude 0 to 2000 m)

Between the input and LG batched terminal and the output and FG batched terminal

Insulation resistance

10 MΩ or higher by 500 V DC insulation resistance tester

(Between the input and LG batched terminal and the output and FG batched terminal, between the input

terminal and the LG terminal, between the output terminal and the FG terminal)

Noise immunity• By noise simulator of 1500 Vp-p noise voltage, 1 µs noise width, and 25 to 60 Hz noise frequency

• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV

Operation indication LED (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)

Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)

Terminal screw size M3.5

Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 mm2

Applicable solderless terminalRAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5, thickness 0.8 mm or less

Two solderless terminals can be connected to one terminal.

Applicable tightening torque 0.66 to 0.89 N·m

External

dimensions

H 90 mm

W 45 mm

D 95 mm

Weight 0.32 kg

Details on items in specificationsThis section describes details on the items in the specifications.

(1) Overcurrent protectionOvercurrent protection works as a protection function to shut off the circuit and stop the system when the current exceeding the specified value flows into the 5 V DC circuit.The POWER LED of the power supply module turns off due to no voltage supply when this function is activated.To restart the system, shut off the power and remove the cause of the problem, such as insufficient current or short-circuit.After the cause is removed, wait for a few minutes and then supply power to the system again. When the output current is back to normal, the system starts initially.

(2) Overvoltage protectionOvervoltage protection works as a protection function to shut off the circuit and stop the system when the voltage of 5.5 V DC or higher is applied to the 5 V DC circuit.The POWER LED of the power supply module turns off when this function is activated.To restart the system, shut off the power, wait for a few minutes, and then supply power to the system again.Then, the system starts initially.If the system does not restart and the POWER LED remains off, replace the power supply module.

App - 9

App - 10

(3) Allowable momentary power failure timeThe system detects an input voltage down and stops its operation when a momentary power failure occurs.Allowable momentary power failure time is the period of time that the system can continue its operation after power is restored.If power fails exceeding this period of time, the system can either continue its operation or start initially,depending on the load of the power supply module. When the system continues its operation, the operation will be the same as that of the system returned within the allowable momentary power failure time.

(4) Inrush currentInrush current is the maximum, instantaneous input current drawn into the circuits immediately after power-on.If power is supplied to the system immediately after shut-off, an inrush current of more than the specified value may flow.Wait for 5 or more seconds after shut-off and then supply power to the system again.When selecting a fuse or breaker for the external circuit, consider blowouts, sensing property, and descriptions in this section.

(5) Input voltageInput voltage is a voltage required for the power supply module to operate normally. If the input voltage is out of the specified range, an error is detected and the system may stop.

Appendix.1.5 Specifications of the END cover

Part names

*1 Do not remove this label because it is for maintenance.

1)

*1

1)

No. Name Description

1) Module joint levers Levers for connecting two modules

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

External dimension diagrams

Specifications

Item Specifications

External dimensions

H 90 mm

W 13 mm

D 95 mm

Internal current consumption 0.04 A

Weight 0.06 kg

13954

94

0

45(4

5)

4

(Unit: mm)

DIN rail center

App - 11

App - 12

Appendix.1.6 Specifications of the AnyWireASLINK master module

The following shows the specifications of the AnyWireASLINK master module LJ51AW12AL.The general specifications of the LJ51AW12AL is the same as the ones of the programmable controller.

( Appendix.1.1 General specifications)

Part namesThe following table lists part names of the AnyWireASLINK master module.

5)

5) 5)

6)

4)

2)

3) 3)

5)1)

No. Name Description

1) LED display

The module status is indicated by the LEDs.

LED name Description

RUN LED (green)

Indicates the operating status of the master module.

ON: Operating normally

OFF: Master module error, 5 V DC power off, or CPU module stop error

LINK LED (green)

Indicates whether data link can be performed in the master module.

Flashing: Data link can be performed.

OFF, ON: Data link cannot be performed.

SET LED (green)

Indicates the address detection status of the master module.

ON: Automatic address detection in progress

OFF: Operating normally

Flashing: Writing in the EEPROM

ALM LED (red)

Indicates the alarm status of the master module.

ON: DP/DN disconnection, no response from the slave module

Slow flashing (one-second intervals): DP/DN short

Fast flashing (0.2-second intervals): 24 V DC is not being supplied or the voltage is low.

OFF: Operating normally

2)SET switch (Automatic

address setting switch)Switch for automatic detection of the slave module ID (address)

3)Transmission cable terminal

blockA terminal block of the AnyWireASLINK

4) Serial number display Displays the serial number printed on the rating plate

5) Module joint lever A lever for connecting modules

6) DIN rail hook A hook for mounting a module to a DIN rail

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

External dimension diagrams

28.595104.5

4

94

0

45(4

5)

4

DIN rail center

(Unit: mm)

Specifications

Item Specifications

Transmission clock 27.0 kHz

Maximum transmission distance (total

length)200 m*2

Transmission system DC power supply transmission total frame cyclic system

Connection type Bus topology (multidrop system, T-branch system, tree branch system)

Transmission protocol Dedicated protocol (AnyWireASLINK)

Error control Checksum, double-check system

Number of connected I/O points Up to 512 points (256 input points/256 output points)

Number of connectable modules Up to 128 (varies depending on the current consumption of each slave module)

RAS functionDisconnected transmission cable location detection function, transmission cable short detection

function, transmission cable voltage drop detection function

Transmission cable (DP, DN)

• UL-listed general-purpose 2-wire cable (VCTF, VCT 1.25 mm2, 0.75 mm2, rated temperature 70°C

or higher)

• UL-listed general-purpose wire (1.25 mm2, 0.75 mm2, rated temperature 70°C or higher)

• Dedicated flat cable (1.25 mm2, 0.75 mm2, rated temperature 90°C)

Power cable (24 V, 0 V)

• UL-listed general-purpose 2-wire cable (VCTF, VCT 0.75 mm2 to 2.0 mm2, rated temperature 70°C

or higher)

• UL-listed general-purpose wire (0.75 mm2 to 2.0 mm2, rated temperature 70°C or higher)

• Dedicated flat cable (1.25 mm2, 0.75 mm2, rated temperature 90°C)

Transmission cable supply current*1When using a 1.25 mm2 cable: Up to 2 A

When using a 0.75 mm2 cable: Up to 1.2 A

Maximum number of writes to EEPROM Up to 100000 times

App - 13

*1 Refer to the table below for information about the relationship among the total length, the wire diameter of transmission cables

(DP, DN), and the transmission cable supply current.

On some slave modules with cables, the wire diameter of the integrated transmission cables (DP, DN) is 0.75 mm2 or less.

However, they can be used without any problem, provided that the wire diameter of transmission cables (DP, DN) meets the

following requirements.

*2 For slave modules with integrated transmission cables (DP, DN), the length of the transmission cables (DP, DN) is ncluded in the

total length.

Power supply

Internal current

consumption (5 V DC)

Voltage: 5 V DC ±5%

Current consumption: Up to 0.2 A

External power supply

Voltage: 21.6 to 27.6 V DC (24 V DC -10% to +15%), ripple voltage 0.5 Vp-p or lower

Recommended voltage: 26.4 V DC (24 V DC + 10%)

Module current consumption: 0.1 A

Transmission cable supply current: Up to 2 A*1

Number of occupied I/O points 32 points (I/O assignment: intelligent 32 points)

External dimensions 90.0 mm(H) × 28.5 mm(W) × 104.5 mm(D)

Weight 0.2 kg

Wire diameter of transmission

cables (DP, DN)

Transmission cable supply current

Total length of 50 m or

less*2

eTotal length of 50 m to

100 m*2

Total length of 100 m to

200 m*2

1.25mm2 MAX 2A MAX 1A MAX 0.5A

0.75mm2 MAX 1.2A MAX 0.6A MAX 0.3A

Item Specifications

App - 14

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Appendix.1.7 Specifications of the output module

The following shows the specifications of the output module LY40NT5P.The general specifications of the LY40NT5P is the same as the ones of the programmable controller.

( Appendix.1.1 General specifications)

Part namesThe following table lists part names of the output module.

1)1)2)

3)4)

5)

1)6)

No. Name Description

1) Module joint levers Levers for connecting two modules

2) I/O indicator LED

Indicates the I/O status.

• On (green): The I/O signal is on.

• Off: The I/O signal is off.

3) Terminal block A 18-point screw terminal block for connecting I/O signal wires of external devices

4) Terminal coverA cover used to prevent an electric shock at power-on.

A sheet is attached on the cover to record the signal names of the devices assigned to the terminals.

5) DIN rail hook A hook used to mount the module to a DIN rail

6) Serial number display Indicates the serial number printed on the rating plate.

External dimensions

28.5117

95

4 490

45(4

5)

4

(Unit: mm)

DIN rail center

App - 15

App - 16

Specifications

(1) Transmission specifications

*1 For details of the protection function, refer to the following.

MELSEC-L I/O Module User's Manual*2 Precautions

• Always use solderless terminals of 0.8 mm or less in thickness for wiring to the terminal block. Up to two solderless terminals can be connected to one terminal block.

• Do not use solderless terminals with insulation sleeve to the terminal block. To prevent short-circuits when screws come loose, it is recommended to cover the wire connection part of the solderless terminals with mark tubes or insulation tubes.

• Use the following wires to the terminal block.

• Use UL-approved solderless terminals (R1.25-3).• Tighten the terminal block screws within the following tightening torque range.

• For how to wire the terminal block, refer to the following.

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

Item Specifications

Number of output points 16 points

Rated load voltage 10.2 V DC to 28.8 V DC

Maximum load current 0.5 A/point, 5 A/common

Maximum inrush current Current is limited by the overload protection function.

Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA or less

Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.2 V DC (TYP.) 0.5 A, 0.3 V DC (MAX.) 0.5 A

Response timeOFF to ON 0.5 ms or less

ON to OFF 1 ms or less (rated load, resistance load)

Surge suppressor Zener diode

Fuse None

External power supplyVoltage 12/24 V DC (ripple rate: 5% or less) (Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 28.8 V DC)

Current 9 mA (at 24 V DC)

Withstand voltage 510 V AC, 1 minute (altitude: 2000 m)

Isolation resistance 10 MΩ or more by isolation resistance tester

Noise immunityBy noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 μs noise width

and 25 to 60 Hz noise frequency

Protection degree IP2X

Common terminal arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB18)

Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: output 16 points)

Protection function*1Overload protection function Limited current when detecting overcurrent: 1.5 A (MIN.)/point, activated to each point

Overheat protection function Activated to each point

External interface 18-point screw terminal block (M3 × 6 screws)*2

5 V DC internal current consumption 100 mA (TYP. all points ON)

Weight 0.15 kg

Applicable wire size Material Temperature rating

0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (22 to 18 AWG) (stranded)

External diameter: 2.8 mm or lessCopper 75°C or more

Screw Tightening torque range

Terminal block screw (M3 screw) 0.42 to 0.58 N•m

Terminal block mounting screw (M3.5 screw) 0.66 to 0.89 N•m

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Appendix.1.8 Specifications of the DC I/O conversion module

The following shows the specifications of DC I/O conversion module FA-TBS40P.

General specifications

*1 Do not use or store in a pressurized environment greater than the atmospheric pressure at an altitude of 0 m.

*2 Indicates how an assumption has been made on the point at which the devices are connected from the public power grid to the

machinery and equipment inside the facilities.

*3 This is a guideline indicating the extent to which conducting substances are found in the environment in which the devices are

used.

Item Specifications

Operating Surrounding

air temperature0 to 55°C

Storage ambient

temperature-25 to 75°C

Operating ambient

humidity5 to 95% RH, no condensation

Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95% RH, no condensation

Vibration resistance

Compliant standards JIS B 3502, IEC61131-2

Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Sweep count

Under intermittent

vibration

10 to 57 Hz - 0.075 mm 10 times each in X, Y,

and Z axis directions57 to 150 Hz 9.8 m/s2 (1G) -

Under continuous

vibration

10 to 57 Hz - 0.035 mm-

57 to 150 Hz 4.9 m/s2 (0.5G) -

Shock resistance Conforms to JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2 (15G), 3 times each in X, Y, and Z axis directions)

Operating atmosphere There should be no corrosive gases.

Operating altitude*1 2,000 m or lower

Installation location Inside control panel

Overvoltage category*2 II or lower

Pollution level*3 2 or lower

External dimension diagrams

(Unit: mm)

148139

φ4.5 2 40

21

47.8

Sim

ple

lock

(120

°)

7.0

124.

5

40(5

)

App - 17

App - 18

Specifications

*1 Evaluation for UL certification is conducted under resistance load conditions.

Appendix.1.9 Specifications of the connection cable for the DC I/O conversion module

The following shows the specifications of the FA-SCBL10FMV-M connection cable for the DC I/O conversion module.

External dimension diagrams

Item Specifications

Number of I/O points 40 points

Rated voltage 24 V DC (CLASS 2)

Maximum usage voltage 48 V DC (CLASS 2)

Maximum usage current*1 Signal: 1 A

Terminal block

Terminal block

screws

M3 screw, Number of terminals: 40P, 7 mm pitch, with screw retention/drop prevention mechanism

Terminal screw tightening torque range: 43 to 58 N·cm (4.4 to 5.9 kgf·cm)

Applicable wire Applicable wire: 0.3 to 1.25 mm2

Module mounting

Mounting

screws

M4 × 0.7 mm × 25 mm or greater

Tightening torque range: 78.8 to 118 N·cm (8 to 12 kgf·cm)

DIN rail Applicable DIN rail: TH35-7.5Fe, TH35-7.5Al (conform to IEC 60715)

Dielectric withstand voltage 500 V AC for 1 minute

Insulation resistance (initial) 10 MΩ or more by 500 V DC insulation resistance tester

Weight About 190 g

Cable length

300

47

300

With M4 round solderless terminalFG FG

CON1

Programmable controller side

CON2

View

40(B20)

39(A20)

2(B1)

1(A1)

B20

A20

B1

A1

View

(Unit: mm)

With M4 round solderless terminal

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Specifications

Item Specifications

Connector on the programmable

controller side1473381-1: Tyco Electronics Japan G.K.

Connector on the conversion

module sideD7940-7500SC, D3448-7940: 3M Japan Limited

Cable Round forty-core cable, Cable color: Pearl gray

Conductor configuration 28 AWG (0.08 mm2)

Cable length 1.0 m

Solderless terminal M4 (DAIDO SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG.CO.,LTD.: RAV1.25-S4)

Mass Approx. 160 g

Delivery date : Stock production

App - 19

App - 20

Appendix.2 Specifications of the GOT

Appendix.2.1 General specifications

*1 The operating ambient temperature indicates the temperature inside the enclosure of the control panel to which the GOT is

installed.

*2 Do not use or store the GOT under a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at altitude 0 m.

Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Air purging by applying pressure to the control panel may create clearance between the surface sheet and the touch panel. This

may cause the touch panel to be not sensitive enough or the sheet to come off. the screen, making you difficult to use the touch

panel, or the sheet may come off.

*3 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical

power distribution network and the machinery within the premises.

Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities.

The withstand surge voltage for the equipment with the rated voltage up to 300 V is 2500 V.

*4 This indicates the occurrence rate of conductive material in an environment where a device is used. Pollution degree 2 indicates

an environment where only non-conductive pollution occurs normally and a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall

be expected depending on the conditions.

Item Specifications

Operating ambient

temperature*10 °C to 55 °C

Storage ambient

temperature-20°C to 60°C

Operating ambient

humidity10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

Storage ambient

humidity10% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing

Vibration resistance

Compliant with JIS

B3502 and

IEC61131-2

Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Sweep count

Under

intermittent

vibration

5 to 8.4 Hz - 3.5 mm10 times in each X,

Y, or Z direction8.4 to 150 Hz 9.8 m/s2 -

Under

continuous

vibration

5 to 8.4 Hz - 1.75 mm

-8.4 to 150 Hz 4.9 m/s2 -

Shock resistant Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2(15G), 3 times in each X, Y, or Z direction)

Operating

atmosphereNo greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and direct sunlight (as well as at storage)

Operating altitude*2 2000 m or less

Installation location Inside control panel

Overvoltage

category*3II or less

Pollution degree*4 2 or less

Cooling method Self-cooling

GroundingGrounding with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less.

If impossible, connect the ground cable to the control panel.

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Appendix.2.2 Specifications of the GT2715-XTBA

The following shows the specifications of the GT2715-XTBA.

Part names

5)

6)

3)4)

1)2)

18)19)7)7) 7) 17)

20)

24)23)

22)21)

8) 9)7) 7)7)

7) 7)

10)

11)12)

13)14)15)16)

No. Name Description

1) Display section Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

2) Touch panel For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

3)USB interface

(Host/front)

For connecting a USB mouse and a USB keyboard, transferring data, and storing data (Connector shape: TYPE-

A)

4)USB interface

(Device/front)For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B)

5) POWER LED

Lit in blue: Power is properly supplied.

Lit in orange: Screen saving

Blink in orange and blue: Backlight failure

Not lit: Power is not supplied.

6) Human sensor A sensor for sensing the movement of people

7) Unit installation fitting Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

8) Reset switch Hardware reset switch

9) S.MODE switch Used for OS installation at the GOT startup

10)SD memory card access

LED

ON: SD memory card installed

Blink: SD memory card accessed

OFF: SD memory card not installed or SD memory card installed but removal possible

11) SD memory card interface For installing an SD memory card

12) SD memory card cover

Has the function to switch the access to the SD memory card between enabled and disabled states.

When the cover is opened: Access prohibited

When the cover is closed: Access allowed

13) Battery Space for housing the battery

14) Side interface For installing a communication unit

15)USB interface

(Host/back)

For connecting a USB mouse and a USB keyboard, transferring data, and storing data (Connector shape: TYPE-

A)

16)Cable clamp mounting

hole

Cable clamp mounting hole as a precaution against a disconnection of the USB cable (Recommended product:

RSG-130-V0 of KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD.)

17)

Terminating resistor

setting switch

(Inside the cover)

Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port between used and unused states (initial

setting (unused))

18)Auxiliary extension

interfaceFor installing an option unit

19) Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

20)Vertical installation arrow

markFor the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the arrow points upward.

21) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal

22) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack))

23) RS-232 interface For communication with a controller (Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male))

24) RS-422/485 interface For communication with a controller (Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female))

App - 21

App - 22

External dimensions

Performance specificationsItem Specifications

Display section*1 *2

Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 15"

Resolution XGA: 1024 × 768 dots

Display size 304.1 (W) × 228.1 (H) mm

Number of displayed

characters

16-dot standard font: 64 characters × 48 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 85 characters × 64 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life*4 Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25°C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel*3

Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Simultaneous press Up to two points

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensorDetection length 1 m

Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air: 4°C or higher

User memory capacityUser memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 57 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 128 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision ±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25°C)

BatteryGT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25°C)

397

322

300

20

322

1010

6

60 46

10 10382

281

(Unit: mm)

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot

be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or

damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches. The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin• Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the

backlight.

*5 To conform to IP67, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (To conform to IP2X, open

the USB environmental protection cover.)

Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT may not be used in an environment

where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

Built-in interface

RS-2321 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/4851 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

USB (Host)2 channels (front face, rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps, Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device)1 channel (front face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps, Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD memory card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension

interfaceFor installing an option unit

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Productive structure Outside the enclosure: IP67F*5, Inside the enclosure: IP2X

External dimensions 397 (W) × 300 (H) × 60 (D) mm

Panel cut dimensions 383.5 (W) × 282.5 (H) mm

Weight (excluding a fitting) 4.5 kg

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version 1.112S or later

Item Specifications

App - 23

App - 24

Appendix.2.3 Specifications of the GT2512-STBA

The following shows the specifications of the GT2512-STBA.

Part names1)2)

5)

22)

17)

7)

16)

9)

10)11)

12)13)

14)

21) 20)

6) 6)

6) 6)

3)4)

15)

19)

18)

8)

No. Name Description

1) Display section Displays the utility and the user-created screen.

2) Touch panel For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user-created screen

3)USB interface

(Host/front)

For connecting a USB mouse and a USB keyboard, transferring data, and storing data (Connector shape: TYPE-

A)

4)USB interface

(Device/front)For connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: Mini-B)

5) POWER LED

Lit in blue: Power is properly supplied.

Lit in orange: Screen saving

Blink in orange and blue: Backlight failure

Not lit: Power is not supplied.

6) Unit installation fitting Mounting fixtures for fixing the GOT to the control panel

7) Reset switch Hardware reset switch

8) S.MODE switch Used for OS installation at the GOT startup

9)SD memory card access

LED

ON: SD memory card installed

Blink: SD memory card accessed

OFF: SD memory card not installed or SD memory card installed but removal possible

10) SD memory card interface For installing an SD memory card

11) SD memory card cover

Has the function to switch the access to the SD memory card between enabled and disabled states.

When the cover is opened: Access prohibited

When the cover is closed: Access allowed

12) Battery Space for housing the battery

13) Side interface For installing a communication unit

14)USB interface

(Host/back)

For connecting a USB mouse and a USB keyboard, transferring data, and storing data (Connector shape: TYPE-

A)

15)Cable clamp mounting

hole

Cable clamp mounting hole as a precaution against a disconnection of the USB cable (Recommended product:

RSG-130-V0 of KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD.)

16)

Terminating resistor

setting switch

(Inside the cover)

Switches the terminating resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port between used and unused states (initial

setting (unused))

17) Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

18)Vertical installation arrow

markFor the vertical installation, install the GOT so that the arrow points upward.

19) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal

20) Ethernet interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack))

21) RS-232 interface For communication with a controller (Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male))

22) RS-422/485 interface For communication with a controller (Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female))

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

External dimensions

Performance specificationsItem Specifications

Display section*1 *2

Display device TFT color LCD

Screen size 12.1"

Resolution SVGA: 800 × 600 dots

Display size 246 (W) × 184.5 (H) mm

Number of displayed

characters

16-dot standard font: 50 characters × 37 lines (two-byte characters)

12-dot standard font: 66 characters × 50 lines (two-byte characters)

Display color 65536 colors

Brightness adjustment 32 levels

Backlight LED (Not replaceable)

Backlight life*4 Approx. 60000 h (operating ambient temperature: 25°C, display intensity: 50%)

Touch panel*3

Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 × 2 dots (per key)

Simultaneous press Not available*5 (Only 1 point can be touched.)

Life 1 million touches or more (Operating force: 0.98 N or less)

Human sensorDetection length None

Detection temperature None

User memory capacityUser memory capacity Memory for storage (ROM): 32 MB, Memory for operation (RAM): 80 MB

Life (number of write times) 100000 times

Built-in clock precision ±90 seconds/month (Ambient temperature: 25°C)

BatteryGT11-50BAT lithium battery

Life Approx. 5 years (Ambient temperature: 25°C)

316

246

10

10

526

241

241

301

(Unit: mm)

227

App - 25

*1 As a characteristic of liquid crystal display panels, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (never lit) may appear on the panel.

Since liquid crystal display panels comprise a great number of display elements, the appearance of bright and back dots cannot

be reduced to zero.

Individual differences in liquid crystal display panels may cause differences in color, uneven brightness and flickering.

Note that these phenomena are characteristics of liquid crystal display panels and it does not mean the products are defective or

damaged.

*2 Flickering may occur due to vibration, shock, or the display colors.

*3 When a stylus is used, the touch panel has a life of 100 thousand touches. The stylus must satisfy the following specifications.

• Material: polycarbonate resin• Tip radius: 0.8 mm or more

*4 To prevent the display section from burning in and lengthen the backlight life, enable the screen save function and turn off the

backlight.

*5 If you touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel, a touch switch near the touched points may operate

unexpectedly. Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the touch panel.

*6 To conform to IP67, close the USB environmental protection cover by pushing the [PUSH] mark firmly. (To conform to IP2X, open

the USB environmental protection cover.)

Note that the structure does not guarantee protection in all users' environments. The GOT may not be used in an environment

where the GOT is exposed to oil or chemicals for a long time, or where oil mist fills the air.

Built-in interface

RS-2321 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male)

RS-422/4851 channel Transmission speed: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bps

Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female)

Ethernet1 channel Data transfer method: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack)

USB (Host)2 channels (front face, rear face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps, Connector shape: USB-A

USB (Device)1 channel (front face)

Maximum transfer rate: High-Speed 480 Mbps, Connector shape: USB Mini-B

SD memory card 1 channel, SDHC compliant (maximum 32 GB)

Extension interface For installing a communication unit or an option unit

Auxiliary extension

interfaceNone

Side interface For installing a communication unit

Buzzer output Single tone (tone and tone length adjustable)

POWER LED 2 colors (blue and orange)

Productive structure Outside the enclosure: IP67F*6, Inside the enclosure: IP2X

External dimensions 316 (W) × 246 (H) × 52 (D) mm

Panel cut dimensions 302 (W) × 228 (H) mm

Weight (excluding a fitting) 2.4 kg

Compatible software package GT Works3 Version 1.122C or later

Item Specifications

App - 26

A

EN

DIC

ES

Appendix.2.4 Battery replacement procedure

The following explains the procedure for replacing the battery. (Described with the GOT rear face facing up.)Replace the battery within 5 minutes.

(1) Pre-procedurePerform the following before replacing the battery.• Connect the battery connector to the GOT connector.• Leave the GOT on for more than 10 minutes.

(2) Replacement procedure

1. Make sure that the GOT power is off.

AP

P

2. The battery is stored inside the SD memory card cover on the side of the GOT.Open the SD memory card cover as shown in the left figure.

3. After removing the battery from the battery holder of the GOT, unplug the battery connector from the GOT connector.

4. Insert the battery connector to the GOT connector.

SD memory card cover

Connector

Battery

SD memory card cover

Black cableBattery

Connector

Red cable

SD memory card cover

Black cableBattery

Connector

Red cable

App - 27

5. After installing the battery to the battery holder of the GOT, close the SD memory card cover until it clicks.

6. Turn on the GOT.

7. Check that the battery condition is normal with the utility.For details of the battery status display, refer to the following.

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

• Utility startup password: "NEJISHIMEUTL"

SD memory card cover

Connector

Battery

App - 28

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Appendix.3 Restoration Function

Create GOT screen restoration data in advance so that users can restore the GOT screen data even if the data has been deleted accidentally due to an incorrect operation by a user.

Appendix.3.1 Creating restoration data

The following describes the procedure for creating restoration data.

1. Run "GT Designer3" from the Start menu of Windows and open the SCREW TIGHTENING Control Package project.

2. Insert an SD memory card in the personal computer.

3. Click [Communication] → [Write to Memory Card] in the menu.

4. The "Communicate with Memory Card" window appears.

5. Select the following items and click the [Memory Card Write] button.• Destination Memory Card: A drive where

the SD memory card has been inserted• GOT Startup Method: "Install on the

specific drive first"• Install Destination Drive: "C:Built-in Flash

Memory"

6. A confirmation message will appear.Click the [Yes] button.

7. The restoration data is created in the SD memory card.

App - 29

App - 30

Appendix.3.2 Restoration

The following describes the restoration procedure.

(1) Insert the SD memory card in which the restoration data has been stored in the GOT of the operation panel.The following describes how to insert the SD memory card.

1. Make sure that the power to the GOT is off.

2. Open the SD memory card cover as shown in the left figure.

3. After making sure that the SD memory card access LED is off with the SD memory card cover 90 degrees or more open, insert the SD memory card in the SD memory card interface with its front side facing up.

4. Push and close the SD memory card cover until it clicks.

5. After the SD memory card cover is closed, the access to the SD memory card is allowed.

SD memory card access LED

Open the SD memory card cover 90 degrees or more.

A

(2) Install the GOT screen data.

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

POINTPOINTPOINT

When the system management authentication window appears, enter the following information and touch the [Enter] key.

• Password: "NEJISHIMEDSP"

1. Turn on the power to the control panel while holding down the installation switch (S.MODE switch) on the GOT rear face.

2. The message "Install now..." is displayed.It takes a few minutes to complete the installation.

3. The message "Installation has been completed" is displayed.Touch the [OK] switch.

4. The GOT automatically restarts.

5. The "Touch panel calibration" screen is displayed.Follow the instructions on the screen and adjust coordinates.

6. The GOT automatically restarts.

7. The "Clock setting" screen is displayed.Configure the time setting and touch the [OK] switch.

8. The GOT automatically restarts.

9. The startup screen of the SCREW TIGHTENING System appears. The data installation has completed.

Installation switch(S.MODE)

App - 31

App - 32

Appendix.4 Devices Disclosed to Users

Appendix.4.1 M device

The following table lists the M devices disclosed to users (M8000 to M8999) in the devices occupied by this application.

(1) For reading

Device Purpose

M8000 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.1)

M8001 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.2)

M8002 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.3)

M8003 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.4)

M8004 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.5)

M8005 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.6)

M8006 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.7)

M8007 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.8)

M8008 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.9)

M8009 Electric screwdriver start signal (Screwdriver No.10)

M8010 Reserved for the system

M8011 Reserved for the system

M8012 Reserved for the system

M8013 Reserved for the system

M8014 Reserved for the system

M8015 Reserved for the system

M8016 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.1)

M8017 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.2)

M8018 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.3)

M8019 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.4)

M8020 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.5)

M8021 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.6)

M8022 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.7)

M8023 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.8)

M8024 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.9)

M8025 Electric screwdriver torque-up signal (Screwdriver No.10)

M8026 Reserved for the system

M8027 Reserved for the system

M8028 Reserved for the system

M8029 Reserved for the system

M8030 Reserved for the system

M8031 Reserved for the system

M8032 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.1)

M8033 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.2)

M8034 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.3)

M8035 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.4)

M8036 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.5)

M8037 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.6)

M8038 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.7)

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

M8039 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.8)

M8040 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.9)

M8041 Electric screwdriver reverse signal (Screwdriver No.10)

M8042 Reserved for the system

M8043 Reserved for the system

M8044 Reserved for the system

M8045 Reserved for the system

M8046 Reserved for the system

M8047 Reserved for the system

M8050 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.1)

M8051 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.2)

M8052 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.3)

M8053 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.4)

M8054 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.5)

M8055 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.6)

M8056 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.7)

M8057 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.8)

M8058 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.9)

M8059 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.10)

M8060 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.11)

M8061 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.12)

M8062 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.13)

M8063 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.14)

M8064 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.15)

M8065 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.16)

M8066 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.17)

M8067 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.18)

M8068 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.19)

M8069 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.20)

M8070 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.21)

M8071 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.22)

M8072 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.23)

M8073 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.24)

M8074 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.25)

M8075 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.26)

M8076 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.27)

M8077 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.28)

M8078 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.29)

M8079 Screw shelf input signal (Screw shelf No.30)

M8080 Reserved for the system

M8081 Reserved for the system

M8090 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.1)

M8091 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.2)

M8092 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.3)

M8093 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.4)

M8094 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.5)

Device Purpose

App - 33

M8095 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.6)

M8096 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.7)

M8097 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.8)

M8098 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.9)

M8099 Electric screwdriver connection (Screwdriver No.10)

M8100 Reserved for the system

M8101 Reserved for the system

M8102 Reserved for the system

M8103 Reserved for the system

M8104 Reserved for the system

M8105 Reserved for the system

M8106 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.1)

M8107 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.2)

M8108 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.3)

M8109 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.4)

M8110 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.5)

M8111 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.6)

M8112 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.7)

M8113 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.8)

M8114 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.9)

M8115 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.10)

M8116 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.11)

M8117 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.12)

M8118 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.13)

M8119 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.14)

M8120 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.15)

M8121 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.16)

M8122 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.17)

M8123 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.18)

M8124 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.19)

M8125 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.20)

M8126 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.21)

M8127 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.22)

M8128 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.23)

M8129 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.24)

M8130 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.25)

M8131 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.26)

M8132 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.27)

M8133 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.28)

M8134 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.29)

M8135 Screw shelf connection (Screw shelf No.30)

M8136 Reserved for the system

M8137 Reserved for the system

Device Purpose

App - 34

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

(2) For reading/writing

Device Purpose

M8500 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.1)

M8501 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.2)

M8502 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.3)

M8503 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.4)

M8504 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.5)

M8505 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.6)

M8506 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.7)

M8507 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.8)

M8508 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.9)

M8509 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.10)

M8510 Reserved for the system

M8511 Reserved for the system

M8512 Reserved for the system

M8513 Reserved for the system

M8514 Reserved for the system

M8515 Reserved for the system

M8516 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.1)

M8517 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.2)

M8518 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.3)

M8519 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.4)

M8520 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.5)

M8521 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.6)

M8522 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.7)

M8523 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.8)

M8524 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.9)

M8525 Electric screwdriver lamp power supply (Screwdriver No.10)

M8526 Reserved for the system

M8527 Reserved for the system

M8528 Reserved for the system

M8529 Reserved for the system

M8530 Reserved for the system

M8531 Reserved for the system

M8532 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.1)

M8533 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.2)

M8534 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.3)

M8535 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.4)

M8536 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.5)

M8537 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.6)

M8538 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.7)

M8539 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.8)

M8540 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.9)

M8541 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.10)

M8542 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.11)

M8543 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.12)

M8544 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.13)

App - 35

M8545 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.14)

M8546 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.15)

M8547 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.16)

M8548 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.17)

M8549 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.18)

M8550 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.19)

M8551 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.20)

M8552 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.21)

M8553 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.22)

M8554 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.23)

M8555 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.24)

M8556 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.25)

M8557 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.26)

M8558 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.27)

M8559 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.28)

M8560 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.29)

M8561 Screw shelf LED ON (Screw shelf No.30)

M8562 Reserved for the system

M8563 Reserved for the system

M8564 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.1)

M8565 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.2)

M8566 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.3)

M8567 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.4)

M8568 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.5)

M8569 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.6)

M8570 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.7)

M8571 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.8)

M8572 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.9)

M8573 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.10)

M8574 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.11)

M8575 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.12)

M8576 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.13)

M8577 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.14)

M8578 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.15)

M8579 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.16)

M8580 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.17)

M8581 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.18)

M8582 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.19)

M8583 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.20)

M8584 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.21)

M8585 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.22)

M8586 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.23)

M8587 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.24)

M8588 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.25)

M8589 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.26)

M8590 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.27)

Device Purpose

App - 36

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Appendix.4.2 D device

The following table lists the D devices disclosed to users (D8000 to D8999) in the devices occupied by this application.

(1) For reading

M8591 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.28)

M8592 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.29)

M8593 Screw shelf door open/close (Screw shelf No.30)

M8594 Reserved for the system

M8595 Reserved for the system

M8600 Reserved for the system

M8601 Disclosed-to-users output enable signal

M8610 Torque check record registration request signal

M8611 Torque check record registration in progress signal

M8612 Torque check record registration completion signal

M8613 Torque check record registration error completion signal

M8700 Disclosed-to-users barcode reader enable signal

M8701 Disclosed-to-users barcode reader reading completion signal

M8702 Disclosed-to-users barcode reader reading request signal

M8800 Print function start signal

M8801 Print function end signal

M8802 Print execution signal

M8805 Torque check function in execution signal

M8806 Reserved for the system

Device Purpose Remarks

D8099 Electric screwdriver in use (power-on)

On: In use, Off: Not used

(Bit 0: No.1, Bit 1: No.2, Bit 2: No.3, Bit 3:

No.4, Bit 4: No.5, Bit 5: No.6, Bit 6: No.7, Bit

7: No.8, Bit 8: No.9, Bit 9: No.10)

D8100

Date (YYYYMMDD) ASCII codeD8101

D8102

D8103

D8104

Time (HHMMSS) ASCII codeD8105

D8106

D8107 Reserved for the system

D8108 Reserved for the system

D8110

Factory ID ASCII codeD8111

D8112

D8113

Equipment ID ASCII codeD8114

D8115

D8116

Device Purpose

App - 37

D8117

Work table ID ASCII codeD8118

D8119

D8120

D8121

Operator code ASCII codeD8122

D8123

D8124

D8125 Skill ASCII code ("0": Ordinary, "1": Skillful)

D8126 Manager ASCII code ("0": Operator, "1": Manager)

D8127

Order No. ASCII code

D8128

D8129

D8130

D8131

D8132

D8133

D8134

Control No. ASCII code

D8135

D8136

D8137

D8138

D8139

D8140

D8141

D8142

D8143

D8144

D8145

D8146

D8147

D8148

D8149

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 38

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

D8150

Model ASCII code

D8151

D8152

D8153

D8154

D8155

D8156

D8157

D8158

D8159

D8160

D8161

D8162

D8163

D8164

D8165

D8166 Assembly manual No.

D8167 Assembly manual sub No. ASCII code

D8168Number of remaining parts (difference between the planned quantity and the

number of completed parts)

D8169 Completed parts

D8171 No. of work tables

D8172 Work No.

D8173 Start item No.

D8174 End item No.

D8175 Number of items

D8176 Item No.

D8177

Electric screwdriver type ASCII code

D8178

D8179

D8180

D8181

D8182

D8183

D8184

D8185

D8186

D8187Electric screwdriver code ASCII code

D8188

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 39

D8189

Screw type ASCII code

D8190

D8191

D8192

D8193

D8194

D8195

D8196

D8197

D8198

D8199

D8200

D8201

D8202

D8203

D8204Screw code ASCII code

D8205

D8206 Work type

D8207 Number of markings in an item

D8208 Number of screws in an item

D8209 Total number of screws in an assembly manual

D8210 Standard work time

D8211 Availability of cancel

D8212 Screw tightening sequence number in an item

D8213 Lower limit of screw tightening time

D8214 Upper limit of screw tightening time

D8215 Screw tightening sequence number in an assembly manual

D8217

ID No. ASCII code

D8218

D8219

D8220

D8221

D8222

D8223

D8224

D8225

D8226

D8227

D8228

D8229

D8230

D8231

D8232

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 40

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

D8233

Work start date (YYYYMMDD) ASCII codeD8234

D8235

D8236

D8237

Work start time (HHMMSS) ASCII codeD8238

D8239

D8240 Production serial number

D8242Standard time accumulated from the start of work (unit: second) 2 words

D8243

D8244Actual time accumulated from the start of work (unit: second) 2 words

D8245

D8246 Number of OK screws from the start of work

D8247 Number of NG screws from the start of work

D8248 Planned quantity

D8249 Reserved for the system

D8250

Work start date (YYYYMMDD) by item ASCII codeD8251

D8252

D8253

D8254

Work start time (HHMMSS) by item ASCII codeD8255

D8256

D8257 Screw tightening time

D8258 Number of OK screws from the start of work by item

D8259 Number of NG screws from the start of work by item

D8260 Remaining time (unit: second)

(Difference between the accumulated standard time and accumulated actual

time)

2 wordsD8261

D8262 Electric screwdriver code Binary code

D8263 Screw code Binary code

D8264Production serial numbers ASCII code

D8265

D8266Actual time (unit: second) by item 2 words

D8267

D8300 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.1)

D8301 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.2)

D8302 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.3)

D8303 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.4)

D8304 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.5)

D8305 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.6)

D8306 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.7)

D8307 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.8)

D8308 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.9)

D8309 Electric screwdriver code (Screwdriver No.10)

D8310 Reserved for the system

D8311 Reserved for the system

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 41

D8312 Reserved for the system

D8313 Reserved for the system

D8314 Reserved for the system

D8315 Reserved for the system

D8316 Screw color (Screwdriver No.1)

D8317 Screw color (Screwdriver No.2)

D8318 Screw color (Screwdriver No.3)

D8319 Screw color (Screwdriver No.4)

D8320 Screw color (Screwdriver No.5)

D8321 Screw color (Screwdriver No.6)

D8322 Screw color (Screwdriver No.7)

D8323 Screw color (Screwdriver No.8)

D8324 Screw color (Screwdriver No.9)

D8325 Screw color (Screwdriver No.10)

D8326 Reserved for the system

D8327 Reserved for the system

D8328 Reserved for the system

D8329 Reserved for the system

D8330 Reserved for the system

D8331 Reserved for the system

D8332 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.1)

D8333 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.2)

D8334 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.3)

D8335 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.4)

D8336 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.5)

D8337 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.6)

D8338 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.7)

D8339 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.8)

D8340 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.9)

D8341 ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.10)

D8342 Reserved for the system

D8343 Reserved for the system

D8344 Reserved for the system

D8345 Reserved for the system

D8346 Reserved for the system

D8347 Reserved for the system

D8348 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.1)

D8349 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.2)

D8350 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.3)

D8351 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.4)

D8352 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.5)

D8353 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.6)

D8354 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.7)

D8355 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.8)

D8356 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.9)

D8357 Non ASLINK-compatible electric screwdriver color (Screwdriver No.10)

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 42

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

D8358 Reserved for the system

D8359 Reserved for the system

D8360 Reserved for the system

D8361 Reserved for the system

D8362 Reserved for the system

D8363 Reserved for the system

D8364 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.1)

D8365 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.2)

D8366 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.3)

D8367 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.4)

D8368 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.5)

D8369 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.6)

D8370 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.7)

D8371 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.8)

D8372 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.9)

D8373 Electric screwdriver type (Screwdriver No.10)

D8374 Reserved for the system

D8375 Reserved for the system

D8376 Reserved for the system

D8377 Reserved for the system

D8378 Reserved for the system

D8379 Reserved for the system

D8380 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.1)

D8381 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.2)

D8382 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.3)

D8383 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.4)

D8384 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.5)

D8385 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.6)

D8386 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.7)

D8387 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.8)

D8388 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.9)

D8389 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.10)

D8390 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.11)

D8391 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.12)

D8392 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.13)

D8393 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.14)

D8394 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.15)

D8395 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.16)

D8396 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.17)

D8397 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.18)

D8398 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.19)

D8399 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.20)

D8400 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.21)

D8401 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.22)

D8402 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.23)

D8403 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.24)

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 43

D8404 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.25)

D8405 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.26)

D8406 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.27)

D8407 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.28)

D8408 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.29)

D8409 Terminal type (Screw shelf No.30)

D8410 Reserved for the system

D8411 Reserved for the system

D8412 Reserved for the system

D8413 Reserved for the system

D8414 Reserved for the system

D8415 Reserved for the system

D8416 Reserved for the system

D8417 Reserved for the system

D8418 Reserved for the system

D8419 Screw shelf LED color

D8420 RUN state indicator setting (Waiting)

D8421 RUN state indicator setting (Operating)

D8422 RUN state indicator setting (Paused)

D8423 RUN state indicator setting (Minor alarm)

D8424 RUN state indicator setting (Medium alarm)

D8425 RUN state indicator setting (Major alarm)

D8427 Reserved for the system

D8428 Reserved for the system

D8429 Reserved for the system

D8430 Reserved for the system

D8431 Reserved for the system

D8432 Reserved for the system

D8433 Reserved for the system

D8434 Reserved for the system

D8435 Reserved for the system

D8436 Reserved for the system

D8437 Reserved for the system

D8438 Reserved for the system

D8439 Reserved for the system

D8440

Factory ID ASCII codeD8441

D8442

D8443

Equipment ID ASCII codeD8444

D8445

D8446

D8447

Work table ID ASCII codeD8448

D8449

D8450

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 44

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

(2) For reading/writing

D8451 No. of work tables

D8452 Work No.

D8453 Reserved for the system

D8454 Reserved for the system

D8455 Reserved for the system

D8456 Reserved for the system

D8457 Reserved for the system

D8458 Reserved for the system

D8459 Reserved for the system

D8460 Correction of standard work time (%)

D8461 Reserved for the system

D8462 Reserved for the system

D8463 Reserved for the system

D8464 Reserved for the system

D8465 Reserved for the system

D8466 Reserved for the system

D8467 Reserved for the system

D8468 Reserved for the system

D8469 Reserved for the system

Device Purpose Remarks

D8500 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.1)

For ASLINK-compatible electric

screwdrivers

(0: Off, 1: On in red, 2: On in green, 3: On in

yellow, 4: On in blue, 5: On in purple, 6: On

in light blue, 7: On in white)

For non ASLINK-compatible electric

screwdriver colors

(0: Off, 1 to 7: On)

D8501 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.2)

D8502 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.3)

D8503 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.4)

D8504 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.5)

D8505 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.6)

D8506 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.7)

D8507 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.8)

D8508 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.9)

D8509 Electric screwdriver lamp ON (Screwdriver No.10)

D8510 Reserved for the system

D8511 Reserved for the system

D8512 Reserved for the system

D8513 Reserved for the system

D8514 Reserved for the system

D8515 Reserved for the system

D8520

Torque check work start date (YYYYMMDD) ASCII codeD8521

D8522

D8523

D8524

Torque check work start time (HHMMSS) ASCII codeD8525

D8526

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 45

D8527

Torque check operator ID ASCII codeD8528

D8529

D8530

D8531 Screwdriver No. for torque check

D8532 Torque value for torque check

D8533 Electric screwdriver code for torque check

D8534

Electric screwdriver type ASCII code

D8535

D8536

D8537

D8538

D8539

D8540

D8541

D8542

D8543

D8544 Reserved for the system

D8545 Reserved for the system

D8546 Reserved for the system

D8547 Reserved for the system

D8548 Reserved for the system

D8549 Reserved for the system

D8550

External additional information ASCII code

D8551

D8552

D8553

D8554

D8555

D8556

D8557

D8558

D8559

D8560

D8561

D8562

D8563

D8564

D8565

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 46

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

D8566

Reserved for the system ASCII code

D8567

D8568

D8569

D8570

D8571

D8572

D8573

D8574

D8575

D8576

D8577

D8578

D8579

D8580

D8581

D8600 Torque value for OK information registration Measured torque value for nut runner

D8700 Number of bites read by barcode reader (disclosed to users)

D8701

Data read by barcode reader (disclosed to users)

D8702

D8703

D8704

D8705

D8706

D8707

D8708

D8709

D8710

D8711

D8712

D8713

D8714

D8715

D8716

D8717

D8718

D8719

D8720

D8721

D8722

D8723

D8724

D8725

D8726

D8727

D8728

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 47

D8729

Data read by barcode reader (disclosed to users)

D8730

D8731

D8732

D8733

D8734

D8735

D8736

D8737

D8738

D8739

D8740

D8741

D8742

D8743

D8744

D8745

D8746

D8747

D8748

D8749

D8750

D8751

D8752

D8753

D8754

D8755

D8756

D8757

D8758

D8759

D8760

D8761

D8762

D8763

D8764

D8765

D8766

D8767

D8768

D8769

D8770

D8771

D8772

D8773

D8774

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 48

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

D8775

Data read by barcode reader (disclosed to users)

D8776

D8777

D8778

D8779

D8780

D8781

D8782

D8783

D8784

D8785

D8786

D8787

D8788

D8789

D8790

D8791

D8792

D8793

D8794

D8795

D8796

D8797

D8798

D8799

D8800

D8801

D8802

D8803

D8804

D8805

D8806

D8807

D8808

D8809

D8810

D8811

D8812

D8813

D8814

D8815

D8816

D8817

D8818

D8819

D8820

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 49

D8821

Data read by barcode reader (disclosed to users)

D8822

D8823

D8824

D8825

D8826

D8827

D8828

D8829

D8830

D8831

D8832

D8833

D8834

D8835

D8836

D8837

D8838

D8839

D8840

D8841

D8842

D8843

D8844

D8845

D8846

D8847

D8848

D8849

D8850

D8851

D8852

D8853

D8854

D8855

D8856

D8857

D8858

D8859

D8860

D8861

D8862

D8863

D8864

D8865

D8866

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 50

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

D8867

Data read by barcode reader (disclosed to users)

D8868

D8869

D8870

D8871

D8872

D8873

D8874

D8875

D8876

D8877

D8878

D8879

D8880

D8881

D8882

D8883

D8884

D8885

D8886

D8887

D8888

D8889

D8890

D8891

D8892

D8893

D8894

D8895

D8896

D8897

D8898

D8899

CAUTION

• Do not access the "Reserved for the system" devices from a user program. Doing so may cause malfunctions.

• Devices unlisted in the tables within the range of the devices disclosed to users are not used.

Device Purpose Remarks

App - 51

App - 52

Appendix.5 External Interface

The following describes the external interfaces for the SCREW TIGHTENING Application.

Appendix.5.1 List of interfaces

The following table lists the external interfaces for this application.

*1 Registration to the database is optional. When no information is registered, work record is not recorded.

Interface name Function overview

Corresponding production

method Notification source

Cell Line 1 Line 2

Operation mode change

request

Switches the operation mode (Coordinated operation/

Single operation) of work tables.

Work Input screen

External interface

Time notification Acquires the current time from a work table. External interface

Operator information change

requestAssigns an operator ID to a work table.

Work Input screen

External interface

Assembly information change

requestAssigns assembly work step information to a work table.

Work Input screen

External interface

External additional information

registration request

Registers an ID number, order number, and other additional

information to the database.*1

Work Input screen

External interface

Assembly work start/pause

requestRequests the start/pause of assembly work to a work table.

Work Input screen

External interface

Work status report Acquires the assembly work status from a work table. External interface

Work table status report Acquires the operating status from a work table. External interface

Work table alarm reset request Resets alarms that have occurred in a work table. Work Input screen

External interface

A

ICE

S

Appendix.5.2 Details of external interfaces

The following describes the details of the external interfaces for this application.

Operation mode change request

(1) FunctionThis interface switches the operation mode of work tables.

• Single operation mode: Signals from the exter

l system are not accepted.

ND

na

• Coordinated operation mode: Signals from the external system are accepted.

E

(When the application is started, the setting in th ork Input screen is reflected.) P e W

P

A (2) Condition

*1 The operating conditions of the single operation mode are the same as those of the coordinated operation mode.

( = Requests can be accepted., = No requests can be accepted.)

Production method

Cell

Line production method 1/Line production method 2

Operation mode

Single

operation

Coordinated operation

No statusDuring

inspection

During setting

or backup/

restoration

During ASLINK

update

During free

operation

During

assembly work

Operation mode being

switched in the "Work

Input" screen

*1

(3) Data

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 Request mode IN WORD D8658Specify the request mode (0: Single operation mode, 1: Coordinated

operation mode) while the mode change request signal is on.

2Mode change request

signalIN BIT M8620

Turn on this signal at the request.

Turn off this signal after the mode change accept signal turns on.

3Mode change accept

signalOUT BIT M8621

This signal turns on at the normal completion or error operation.

This signal turns off when the mode change request signal is off.

4Mode change error

completion signalOUT BIT M8622

This signal turns on at the error completion.

This signal turns off when the mode change request signal is off.

5 Mode status OUT WORD D8268The request mode (0: Single operation mode, 1: Coordinated

operation mode) is set at the normal completion.

6Mode change

unacceptable signalOUT BIT M8623

This signal turns on while the mode change is disabled (during

assembly work and others).

(4) OperationWhen the mode change request signal is turned on, the operation mode is switched to the mode set as the request mode.At the error completion, the previous status is held.

App - 53

App - 54

(5) Timing chart

POINTPOINTPOINT

When the operation mode is changed on the Work Input screen, the operation mode is forcibly changed.Monitor the operation mode of the work table with the external system as needed.

External system setting Request mode

External system setting Mode change request signal

Application setting Mode change accept signal

Application setting Mode change error completion signal

Application setting Mode status

Application setting Mode change unacceptable signal

Single operation request↓

Error completion while the mode change unacceptable signal is ON

Single operation request

Coordinated operation request

Failed due to assembly work in progress.

A

Time notification

(1) FunctionThis interface acquires the current time from a work table.

S

A

PP

EN

DIC

E

(2) Condition

( = Requests can be accepted., = No requests can be accepted.)

Production method

Cell

Line production method 1/Line production method 2

Operation mode

Single

operation

Coordinated operation

No statusDuring

inspection

During setting

or backup/

restoration

During ASLINK

update

During free

operation

During

assembly work

Operation mode being

switched in the "Work

Input" screen

(3) Data

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 Time OUTWORD(9)

ASCII: 18 characters

D8100 to

D8106The current time (YYYYMMDDhhmmss) is set.

(4) OperationThe time is updated every second in work tables. (Even though an error has occurred on the work table, it is not notified.)Use this interface to compare the time acquired from a work table at the one-second or longer cycle with the previously acquired value.• When the acquired time differs from the previous value: Determine that the communication has been

established.• When the acquired time is the same as the previous value: Determine that the communication has been

disconnected and change the mode of the external system to 0 (single operation mode).

(5) Timing chart

POINTPOINTPOINT

When the communication has been disconnected, provide the retry processing as needed.

Communication establishment status

External system setting KeepAlive

Application setting Time

Communication disconnection status

External system setting

External system setting KeepAlive

Application setting Time

Communication is disconnected.↓

Screw tightening equipment error

Mode status(External system)

App - 55

App - 56

Operator information change request

(1) FunctionThis interface assigns an operator ID to a work table.(When the application is started, no one has logged in to the system.)

(2) Condition

( = Requests can be accepted., = No requests can be accepted.)

Production method

Cell

Line production method 1/Line production method 2

Operation mode

Single

operation

Coordinated operation

No statusDuring

inspection

During setting

or backup/

restoration

During ASLINK

update

During free

operation

During

assembly work

Operation mode being

switched in the "Work

Input" screen

(3) DataNo. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 Operator ID INWORD(4)

ASCII: 7 characters

D8610 to

D8613

Specify an operator ID (seven digits in one-byte alphanumeric

characters) to be assigned to a work table.

2Operator information

change request signalIN BIT M8625

Turn on this signal at the request.

Turn off this signal after the operator information change

completion signal turns on.

3During assembly

work signalOUT BIT M8651 This signal is on during assembly work.

4

Operator information

change completion

signal

OUT BIT M8626

This signal turns on at the normal completion or error operation.

This signal turns off when the operator information change

request signal is off.

5

Operator information

change error

completion signal

OUT BIT M8627

This signal turns on at the error completion.

This signal turns off when the operator information change

request signal is off.

(4) OperationWhen the operator information change request signal turns on, the screen is switched to the "Work Input" screen, the specified operator ID information is acquired from the database, and the status becomes the login status.When the information cannot be acquired, an alarm message is displayed on the Work Input screen.At the error completion, the previous status is held.

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

(5) Timing chart

POINTPOINTPOINT

• The operator that has logged in to the system is forcibly logged out and the specified operator ID is used to log in to the system.

• Specifying "NULL" to the operator ID clears the operator information and logs out the operator that has logged in to the system.

• Specifying the following operator ID allows the operator to log in to the system without accessing the database.

No. Operator ID Type of user Skill Operator name

1 FFFFFFF Manager Skillful User001

2 FFFFFFE Manager Ordinary User002

3 FFFFFEF Operator Skillful User003

4 FFFFFEE Operator Ordinary User004

Normal completion

External system setting Operator ID

External system setting Operator information change request signal

Application setting During assembly work signal

Application setting Operator information change completion signal

Application setting Operator information change error completion signal

Error completion (No corresponding data)

External system setting Operator ID

External system setting Operator information change request signal

Application setting Operator information change completion signal

Application setting Operator information change error completion signal

Acquiring data from the database is attempted.↓

Acquisition error (No corresponding data)

App - 57

App - 58

Assembly information change request

(1) FunctionThis interface assigns assembly work step information to a work table.(When the application is started, no information is assigned to work tables.)

(2) Condition

( = Requests can be accepted., = No requests can be accepted.)

Production method

Cell

Line production method 1/Line production method 2

Operation mode

Single

operation

Coordinated operation

No statusDuring

inspection

During setting

or backup/

restoration

During ASLINK

update

During free

operation

During

assembly work

Operation mode being

switched in the "Work

Input" screen

(3) Data

(a) Line production method 1

(b) Line production method 2

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 Order No. INWORD(7)

ASCII: 13 characters

D8616 to

D8622

Specify an order number (13 digits in one-byte

alphanumeric characters) to be assigned to a work table.

2During assembly work

signalOUT BIT M8651 This signal is on during assembly work.

3Assembly information

change request signalIN BIT M8630

Turn on this signal at the request.

Turn off this signal after the assembly information

change completion signal turns on.

4Assembly information

change completion signalOUT BIT M8631

This signal turns on at the normal completion or error

operation.

This signal turns off when the assembly information

change request signal is off.

5

Assembly information

change error completion

signal

OUT BIT M8632

This signal turns on at the error completion.

This signal turns off when the assembly information

change request signal is off.

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 Control No. INWORD(16)

ASCII: 32 characters

D8623 to

D8638

Specify a control number (32 digits in one-byte

alphanumeric characters) to be assigned to a work table.

2 Sub No. INWORD(1)

ASCII: 2 charactersD8639

Specify a sub number (two digits in one-byte

alphanumeric characters) to be assigned to a work table.

3During assembly work

signalOUT BIT M8651 This signal is on during assembly work.

4Assembly information

change request signalIN BIT M8630

Turn on this signal at the request.

Turn off this signal after the assembly information

change completion signal turns on.

5Assembly information

change completion signalOUT BIT M8631

This signal turns on at the normal completion or error

operation.

This signal turns off when the assembly information

change request signal is off.

6

Assembly information

change error completion

signal

OUT BIT M8632

This signal turns on at the error completion.

This signal turns off when the assembly information

change request signal is off.

A

ICE

S

(4) OperationWhen the assembly information change request signal turns on, the screen is switched to the "Work Input" screen and the information of the specified order No. or control No./sub No. is acquired from the database and registered in the work table.When the information has been registered, the existing information is overwritten with the new information.When no corresponding data is found in the database, the existing information is cleared.At the error completion, the previous status is held.

AP

PE

ND

(5) Timing chart

For line production method 1

External system setting Order No.

Application setting During assembly work signal

External system setting Assembly information change request signal

Application setting Assembly information change completion signal

Application setting Assembly information change error completion signal

For line production method 2

External system setting Control No.

External system setting Sub No.

Application setting During assembly work signal

External system setting Assembly information change request signal

Application setting Assembly information change completion signal

Application setting Assembly information change error completion signal

App - 59

App - 60

External additional information registration request

(1) FunctionThis interface registers the ID No., external additional information, and order number to the database.(When the application is started, they have not been registered.)

(2) Condition

( = Requests can be accepted., = No requests can be accepted.)

Production method

Cell

Line production method 1/Line production method 2

Operation mode

Single

operation

Coordinated operation

No statusDuring

inspection

During setting

or backup/

restoration

During ASLINK

update

During free

operation

During

assembly work

Operation mode being

switched in the "Work

Input" screen

(3) Data

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 ID No. INWORD(16)

ASCII: 32 characters

D8640 to

D8655

Specify an ID No. (32 digits in one-byte alphanumeric

characters) to be registered in the database.

2 External additional information INWORD(16)

ASCII: 32 characters

D8550 to

D8665

Specify the external additional information (32 digits

in one-byte alphanumeric characters) to be

registered in the database. (Specify "NULL" when the

information is not required.)

3 Order No. INWORD(7)

ASCII: 13 characters

D8616 to

D8622

Specify an order number (13 digits in one-byte

alphanumeric characters) to be registered in the

database. (Specify "NULL" when the information is

not required.)

4 During assembly work signal OUT BIT M8651 This signal is on during assembly work.

5External additional information

registration request signalIN BIT M8635

Turn on this signal at the request.

Turn off this signal after the external additional

information registration completion signal turns on.

6External additional information

registration completion signalOUT BIT M8636

This signal turns on at the normal completion or error

operation.

This signal turns off when the external additional

information registration request signal is off.

7

External additional information

registration error completion

signal

OUT BIT M8637

This signal turns on at the error completion.

This signal turns off when the external additional

information registration request signal is off.

(4) OperationWhen the external additional information registration request signal turns on, the screen is switched to the "Work Input" screen and the specified ID No., external additional information, and order number are registered in the database.When the information has been registered, the existing information is overwritten with the new information.At the error completion, the previous status is held.

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

(5) Timing chart

External system setting ID No.

External system setting External additional information

External system setting Order No.

Application setting During assembly work signal

External system setting

Application setting

Application setting External additional information registration error completion signal

External additional information registration completion signal

External additional information registration request signal

App - 61

App - 62

Assembly work start/pause request

(1) FunctionThis interface requests the start/pause of assembly work to a work table.

(2) Condition

( = Requests can be accepted., = No requests can be accepted.)

Production method

Cell

Line production method 1/Line production method 2

Operation mode

Single

operation

Coordinated operation

No statusDuring

inspection

During setting

or backup/

restoration

During ASLINK

update

During free

operation

During

assembly work

Operation mode being

switched in the "Work

Input" screen

(3) Data

*1 Used only when the production method is the line production method 1.

*2 Used only at the work start request.

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 Work start request signal IN BIT M8640

Turn on this signal at the start of the request.

Turn off this signal after the assembly start accept completion

signal turns on.

2Work pause request

signalIN BIT M8641

Turn on this signal at the pause request.

Turn off this signal after the assembly pause accept completion

signal turns on.

3Planned production

quantity*1, *2IN WORD(1) D8656

Specify the planned production quantity (3 digits in one-byte

numerical characters). Users cannot set a value exceeding the

planned quantity registered in the database.

4Work item start request

No.*2IN WORD(1) D8657

Specify a work item No. (3 digits in one-byte numerical characters)

to start.

5 Accept completion signal OUT BIT M8642

This signal turns on at the normal completion or error operation.

This signal turns off when the work start request signal/work

pause request signal is off.

6Accept error completion

signalOUT BIT M8643

This signal turns on at the error completion.

This signal turns off when the work start request signal/work

pause request signal is off.

7 Work ready signal OUT BIT M8650 This signal turns on when the assembly work is ready.

8During assembly work

signalOUT BIT M8651 This signal is on during assembly work.

(4) OperationWhen the work start request signal turns on, the screen is switched to the "Assembly work step" screen and assembly work is started.When the work pause request signal turns on, assembly work is paused and the screen is switched to the "Work Input" screen.At the error completion, the previous status is held.

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

(5) Timing chart

Assembly work start request

External system setting Work start request signal

Application setting Accept completion signal

Application setting Accept error completion signal

Application setting Work ready signal

Application setting During assembly work signal

Assembly work pause request

External system setting Work pause request signal

Application setting Accept completion signal

Application setting Accept error completion signal

Application setting During assembly work signal

Error completion while During assembly work signal is ON

Error completion while Work ready signal is OFF

Error completion while During assembly work signal is OFF

App - 63

App - 64

Work status report

(1) FunctionThis interface acquires the assembly work status from a work table.

(2) Condition

( = Requests can be accepted., = No requests can be accepted.)

Production method

Cell

Line production method 1/Line production method 2

Operation mode

Single

operation

Coordinated operation

No statusDuring

inspection

During setting

or backup/

restoration

During ASLINK

update

During free

operation

During

assembly work

Operation mode being

switched in the "Work

Input" screen

(3) Data

*1 When all the bits are off, Work ready signal turns on.

*2 Used only when the production method is the line production method 2.

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 Work ready signal OUT BIT M8650

On: The assembly work is ready to start or during assembly work.

Off: The assembly work is not ready.

(At completion of screw tightening, this signal turns off to clear the

ID No.)

2 During assembly work signal OUT BIT M8651On: During assembly work

Off: Assembly work is not performed.

3Item No. during assembly

workOUT WORD(1) D8176 1 to 200: Item No. during assembly work

4 Work start item No. OUT WORD(1) D8173 1 to 200: Work start item No.

5 Work end item No. OUT WORD(1) D8174 1 to 200: Work end item No.

6Work completion status

informationOUT WORD(1) D8270

Assembly work completion status for one product

0: Before the start of assembly work or during assembly work

1: Normal completion

2: Interruption by the operation performed by the operator

3: Interruption by alarms that have occurred in the work table

4: Interruption by instructions from the external system

(The information is cleared to 0 at the start of assembly work.)

7 Work ready state OUT WORD(1)*1 D8271

Bit0 Operator information registration (On = No/Off = Yes)

Bit1 Assembly information registration (On = No/Off = Yes)

Bit2 ID information registration (On = No/Off = Yes)*2

Bit3 Assembly information in the work table (On = No/Off = Yes)

Bit4Screw box verification status (On = Not completed/Off =

Completed)

Bit5

Reserved by the system

Bit6

Bit7

Bit8

Bit9

BitA

BitB

BitC

BitD

BitE

BitF

A

Work table status report

(1) FunctionThis interface acquires the operating status from a work table.

S

A

PP

EN

DIC

E

(2) Condition

( = Requests can be accepted., = No requests can be accepted.)

Production method

Cell

Line production method 1/Line production method 2

Operation mode

Single

operation

Coordinated operation

No statusDuring

inspection

During setting

or backup/

restoration

During ASLINK

update

During free

operation

During

assembly work

Operation mode being

switched in the "Work

Input" screen

(3) Data

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 Operating status information OUT WORD(1) D8272

Bit0 Operating status (On = Operating/Off = Waiting)

Bit1Inspection status (On = Inspection in progress/Off =

Inspection not in progress)

Bit2Free operation status (On = Free operation in

progress/Off = Free operation not in progress)

Bit3Setting status (On = Setting in progress/Off = Setting

not in progress)

Bit4

Reserved by the systemBit5

Bit6

Bit7Major alarm status (On = Occurred/Off = Not

occurred)

Bit8Medium alarm status (On = Occurred/Off = Not

occurred)

Bit9Minor alarm status (On = Occurred/Off = Not

occurred)

BitA

Reserved by the system

BitB

BitC

BitD

BitE

BitF

App - 65

App - 66

Work table alarm reset request

(1) FunctionThis interface resets the alarms (except for system alarms) that have occurred in the work table.

(2) Condition

( = Requests can be accepted., = No requests can be accepted.)

Production method

Cell

Line production method 1/Line production method 2

Operation mode

Single

operation

Coordinated operation

No statusDuring

inspection

During setting

or backup/

restoration

During ASLINK

update

During free

operation

During

assembly work

Operation mode being

switched in the "Work

Input" screen

(3) Data

No. Signal/data IN/OUT Data type Device Description

1 Alarm reset request signal IN BIT M8645 Turn on this signal at the request.

2 Reset accept signal OUT BIT M8646 This signal turns on when the request is accepted.

(4) OperationTurning on the alarm reset request signal resets the alarms that have occurred in the work table.

(5) Timing chart

POINTPOINTPOINT

Alarms that cannot be cleared by the alarm reset operation may have occurred even when the completion signal is on.

External system setting Alarm reset request signal

Application setting Reset accept signal

A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Appendix.5.3 Operation image

The following figures show the images of the operation when this application is used with the external interfaces.

(1) Timing chart of when the work is started

Work table Work table Work table Work table

<No workpiece> Workpiece to be assembled Workpiece to be assembled Workpiece to be assembled

GOT

Waiting

GOTGOT

Waiting

GOT

Waiting During assembly work

During assembly work

Work table status

1) Waiting for workpieces 2) Waiting for the start of work 3) During assembly work 4) Waiting for workpieces to be transported

External system setting Control No.

External system setting Sub No.

External system setting ID No.

External system setting External additional information

External system setting Order No.

External system setting Work item start request No.

External system setting

Application setting

Application setting

External system setting

Application setting

During assembly work

Application setting Work ready signal

External system setting Work start request signal

Application setting During assembly work signal

Application setting

Application setting

During assembly work

Work table Work table Work table Work table

<No workpiece> Workpiece to be assembled Workpiece to be assembled Workpiece to be assembled

GOT

Waiting

GOT

Waiting

GOT

Waiting During assembly work

1) Waiting for workpieces 2) Waiting for the start of work 3) During assembly work 4) Waiting for workpieces to be transported

Assembly request

Assembly work error completion signal

Assembly work completion signal

External additional information registration completion signal

External additional information registration request signal

Assembly information change error completion signal

Assembly information change completion signal

Assembly information change request signal

External system setting Control No.

External system setting Sub No.

External system setting ID No.

External system setting External additional information

External system setting Order No.

External system setting Work item start request No.

External system setting

Application setting

Application setting

External system setting

Application setting

During assembly work

Application setting Work ready signal

External system setting Work start request signal

Application setting During assembly work signal

Application setting

Application setting Assembly work error completion signal

Assembly work completion signal

External additional information registration completion signal

External additional information registration request signal

Assembly information change error completion signal

Assembly information change completion signal

Assembly information change request signal

App - 67

App - 68

(2) Timing chart of when the work is paused

When the work is paused in the middle

During assembly work

Application setting Work ready signal

External system setting Work start request signal

External system setting Work pause request signal

Application setting During assembly work signal

Application setting Assembly work completion signal

Application setting Assembly work error completion signal

During assembly work

REVISIONS

© 2017 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Revision date Manual number Revision

January 2017 BCN-EP2005-0010-A First edition

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may

occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

WARRANTYPlease check the following product warranty details before using this Control Package.

(1) Software included in this Control PackageCheck "END-USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT" (BCN-EP2005-0001) included in the package.

(2) Hardware included as a system component of this systemCheck the product warranty details of each hardware.

Adobe Reader is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and

other countries.

Anywire, AnyWireASLINK, and POKAYOKE terminal are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Anywire

Corporation.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. in Japan.

Microsoft, Microsoft Excel, SQL Server, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

QR Code is either a registered trademark or a trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in the United States, Japan,

and other countries.

The SD and SDHC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

All other company names, system names, and product names used in this manual are generally

either registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.

The trademark symbols (™, ®) may not be described in this manual.

BCN-EP2005-0010-A(1701)CDS

Specifications subject to change without notice.

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to theMinistry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.